← Kaccāyana-Byākaraṇaṃ
Kaccāyana-Byākaraṇaṃ
Kaccāyana's Grammar
2-Nāma-Kappa · 2-Noun Chapter
Bilingual Pāḷi–English edition · 219 suttas · 5 sectionsv1.5ESEN
100% 0 / 219 studied
Kaṇḍa:
Paṭhama-Kaṇḍa· First section
52Kaccāyana Sutta. 60Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Jinavacanayuttaṃ hi
[Jinavacanayuttaṃ + hi = 2 words]

“Jinavacanayuttaṃ hi” icc etaṃ adhikāratthaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Conforming to the Word of the Victorious One.
“Conforming to the Word of the Victorious One (Buddha)”. This should be understood as a governing aphorism,1This is an adhikāra-sutta, a governing aphorism of general application that rules the whole work. There are three kinds of adhikāra: (1) sīha-gatika (“lion's movement”), which affects all the preceding and following suttas; (2) maṇḍūka-gatika (“frog's movement”), which affects only certain suttas related to one another; and (3) yathānupubbika, which affects in sequential order, especially the following suttas. The present sutta is of the first kind. Everything mentioned in this text is in accordance with the word of the Buddha, that is, with the language used by him. i.e., as applying to all the suttas backward and forward.

1This is an adhikāra-sutta, a governing aphorism of general application that rules the whole work. There are three kinds of adhikāra: (1) sīha-gatika (“lion's movement”), which affects all the preceding and following suttas; (2) maṇḍūka-gatika (“frog's movement”), which affects only certain suttas related to one another; and (3) yathānupubbika, which affects in sequential order, especially the following suttas. The present sutta is of the first kind. Everything mentioned in this text is in accordance with the word of the Buddha, that is, with the language used by him.
53Kaccāyana Sutta. 61Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Liṅgañ ca nippajjate (192)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Liṅgaṃ + ca + nippajjate = 3 words]

Yathā yatthā jinavacanayuttaṃ hi liṅgaṃ, tathā tathā idha liṅgañ ca nippajjate.

Taṃ yathā? Eso no satthā, brahmā, attā, sakhā, rājā.

And the base should be established.2The particle “ca” in the sutta serves to include the roots (dhātu) as well; these too should be established in conformity with the Word of the Victorious One. The term liṅga can be translated in this context as “base” or “stem”; in other grammatical contexts it means gender. The real examples of this sutta are the bases “esa”, “amha”, “satthu”, “brahma”, “atta”, “sakha” and “rāja”; since it is impossible to show the bases without their inflections (nāma-vibhatti), they are presented here as completed words –base plus inflection–.
Here the base should be established in such a way that it conforms to the Word of the Victorious One.
As what? Eso no Satthā (this is our Teacher), brahmā (Brahmā), attā (the self; oneself), sakhā (friend), rājā (king).

2The particle “ca” in the sutta serves to include the roots (dhātu) as well; these too should be established in conformity with the Word of the Victorious One. The term liṅga can be translated in this context as “base” or “stem”; in other grammatical contexts it means gender. The real examples of this sutta are the bases “esa”, “amha”, “satthu”, “brahma”, “atta”, “sakha” and “rāja”; since it is impossible to show the bases without their inflections (nāma-vibhatti), they are presented here as completed words –base plus inflection–.
54Kaccāyana Sutta. 62Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tato ca vibhattiyo (202-3)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tato + ca + vibhattiyo = 3 words]

Tato jinavacanayuttehi liṅgehi vibhattiyo parā honti.

And after those, the [nominal] inflections.3The particle “ca” in the sutta indicates that the inflections are also employed after the indeclinables that end with the suffixes ‘tave’, ‘tunā’, etc.
Inflections are placed after the bases that conform to the Word of the Victorious One.

3The particle “ca” in the sutta indicates that the inflections are also employed after the indeclinables that end with the suffixes ‘tave’, ‘tunā’, etc.
55Kaccāyana Sutta. 63Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Si yo, aṃ yo, nā hi, sa naṃ, smā hi, sa naṃ, smiṃ su (200)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Si yo, aṃ yo, nā hi, sa naṃ, smā hi, sa naṃ, smiṃ su = 1 word]

Kā ca pana tāyo vibhattiyo? Si, yo iti paṭhamā; aṃ, yo iti dutiyā; nā, hi iti tatiyā; sa, naṃ iti catutthī; smā, hi iti pañcamī; sa, naṃ iti chaṭṭhī; smiṃ, su iti sattamī.

Vibhatti icc anena kvattho? Amhassa mamaṃ savibhattissa se.

‘Si, yo’, ‘aṃ, yo’, ‘nā, hi’, ‘sa, naṃ’, ‘smā, hi’, ‘sa, naṃ’, ‘smiṃ, su’.4The inflections are divided into eight pairs: first (paṭhamā), second (dutiyā), third (tatiyā), fourth (catutthī), fifth (pañcamī), sixth (chaṭṭhī), seventh (sattamī) and eighth (aṭṭhamī). Aṭṭhamī is the name of the endings of the vocative case and, in the order of the declensions, it is placed after the first. The first of each pair is singular and the second is plural. Pāḷi has no dual number.
And which are those inflections? ‘Si, yo’ are the first [pair]; ‘aṃ, yo’ the second; ‘nā, hi’ the third; ‘sa, naṃ’ the fourth; ‘smā, hi’ the fifth; ‘sa, naṃ’ the sixth; ‘smiṃ, su’ the seventh.
What is the use of saying “inflection”? [To use it in suttas such as] “Amhassa mamaṃ savibhattissa se” (§120), etc. When ‘sa’ follows, “amha” together with the inflection [is substituted by] “mamaṃ”.

4The inflections are divided into eight pairs: first (paṭhamā), second (dutiyā), third (tatiyā), fourth (catutthī), fifth (pañcamī), sixth (chaṭṭhī), seventh (sattamī) and eighth (aṭṭhamī). Aṭṭhamī is the name of the endings of the vocative case and, in the order of the declensions, it is placed after the first. The first of each pair is singular and the second is plural. Pāḷi has no dual number.
56Kaccāyana Sutta. 64Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tadanuparodhena
[Taṃ-an-uparodhena = 1 word]

Yathā yathā tesaṃ jinavacanānaṃ anuparodho, tathā tathā idha liṅgañ ca nippajjate.

By not contradicting those.5The particle “ca” in the sutta indicates that the verbs (ākhyāta) should also be formed in conformity with the Word of the Victorious One. The difference between this sutta and §53 · Liṅgañ ca nippajjate — And the base should be established.">§53 is that by §53 · Liṅgañ ca nippajjate — And the base should be established.">§53 the base should be established in conformity with the Word of the Victorious One, while by this sutta the completed form should be established in conformity with the Word of the Victorious One. Example: according to §53 · Liṅgañ ca nippajjate — And the base should be established.">§53, the base of the word “puriso” (nominative singular) should be put down as “purisa” and not as “puruṣa” (as in Sanskrit); when the word is formed, it should be “puriso” and not “puruṣaḥ”.
Here the gender [and the completed form] should be established in such a way that it does not contradict the Words of the Victorious One.

5The particle “ca” in the sutta indicates that the verbs (ākhyāta) should also be formed in conformity with the Word of the Victorious One. The difference between this sutta and §53 is that by §53 the base should be established in conformity with the Word of the Victorious One, while by this sutta the completed form should be established in conformity with the Word of the Victorious One. Example: according to §53, the base of the word “puriso” (nominative singular) should be put down as “purisa” and not as “puruṣa” (as in Sanskrit); when the word is formed, it should be “puriso” and not “puruṣaḥ”.
57Kaccāyana Sutta. 71Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ālapane si gasañño (204)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ālapane + si + gasañño = 3 words]

Ālapanatthe si gasañño hoti.

Bhoti ayye (Vin. ii, 280)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 280; bhoti kaññe; bhoti Kharādiye (Khu. v, 4)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 4.

Ālapane ti kimatthaṃ? Sā ayyā (Vin. ii, 307)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 307.

Sī ti kimatthaṃ? Bhotiyo ayyāyo (Vin. ii, 288)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 288.

Ga icc anena kvattho? Ghat’ e ca.

In the vocative, ‘si’ is named ‘ga’.
In the meaning of vocative, ‘si’ has the name ‘ga’.

  1. Bhoti ayye = Dear lady!6Both “bhoti” and “ayye”, etc., are examples. When forming these words, the inflection ‘si’ is employed; then, by this sutta, ‘si’ is named ‘ga’, and the application of the other suttas follows to complete the word.
  2. Bhoti kaññe = Dear girl!
  3. Bhoti Kharādiye = Dear Kharādiyā!

What is the purpose of saying “vocative”? [To prevent the operation of this rule in other cases such as] “Sā ayyā” (that lady) –here the case is not vocative but nominative–.

What is the purpose of saying ‘si’? [To prevent the operation of this rule in the example] “Bhotiyo ayyāyo” –here the inflection is ‘yo’, not ‘si’–.7There are two inflections ‘si’: (1) the ‘si’ of the nominative singular (paṭhamā) and (2) the ‘si’ of the vocative singular (ālapana), to which this sutta gives the name ‘ga’. The purpose of this name is to allow the application of the morphological procedures prescribed by the pertinent suttas, and to distinguish precisely between both inflections ‘si’. This explanation was taken from the book of the Venerable A. Thitzana.

What is the use of the name ‘ga’? [For the use of the name ‘ga’ in suttas such as] “Ghat’ e ca” (§114). After ‘gha’ there is [substitution of ‘ga’] by ‘e’.8Both “bhoti” and “ayye”, etc., are examples. When forming these words, the inflection ‘si’ is employed; then, by this sutta, ‘si’ is named ‘ga’, and the application of the other suttas follows to complete the word.


6Both “bhoti” and “ayye”, etc., are examples. When forming these words, the inflection ‘si’ is employed; then, by this sutta, ‘si’ is named ‘ga’, and the application of the other suttas follows to complete the word.
7There are two inflections ‘si’: (1) the ‘si’ of the nominative singular (paṭhamā) and (2) the ‘si’ of the vocative singular (ālapana), to which this sutta gives the name ‘ga’. The purpose of this name is to allow the application of the morphological procedures prescribed by the pertinent suttas, and to distinguish precisely between both inflections ‘si’. This explanation was taken from the book of the Venerable A. Thitzana.
8Both “bhoti” and “ayye”, etc., are examples. When forming these words, the inflection ‘si’ is employed; then, by this sutta, ‘si’ is named ‘ga’, and the application of the other suttas follows to complete the word.
58Kaccāyana Sutta. 29Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ivaṇṇ’-uvaṇṇā jha-lā (205)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ivaṇṇa-uvaṇṇā + jha-lā = 2 words]

Ivaṇṇ’-uvaṇṇā icc ete jha-lasaññā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Isino, aggino, gahapatino, daṇḍino. Setuno, ketuno, bhikkhuno. Sayambhuno, abhibhuno.

Jha la icc anena kvattho? Jha-lato sassa no vā.

‘I’, ‘ī’ and ‘u’, ‘ū’ [are named] ‘jha’, ‘la’.
The letters ‘i’ and ‘ī’, and ‘u’ and ‘ū’, are respectively named ‘jha’ and ‘la’.
The examples are “isino”, etc. When forming the word “isino”, first the base is put down as “isi”, then the sixth inflection ‘sa’ is employed; then the second ‘i’ of “isi” is given the name ‘jha’ by this sutta. The same should be done with the nouns whose bases end in ‘ī’, ‘u’, ‘ū’.
What is the use of the names ‘jha’ and ‘la’? [For the use of the names ‘jha’ and ‘la’ in suttas such as] “Jha-lato sassa no vā” (§117). Optionally, after ‘jha’ and ‘la’, ‘sa’ [is substituted by ‘no’].
59Kaccāyana Sutta. 182Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Te itthikhyā po (206)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Te + itthikhyā + po = 3 words]

Te ivaṇṇ’-uvaṇṇā yadā itthikhyā, tadā pasaññā honti.

Rattiyā, itthiyā, dhenuyā, vadhuyā.

Itthikhyā ti kimatthaṃ? Isinā, bhikkhunā.

Pa icc anena kvattho? Pato yā.

Those that mean feminine [gender] [are named] ‘pa’.
Those letters ‘i’, ‘ī’ and ‘u’, ‘ū’, when they mean feminine [gender], are named ‘pa’.
Examples: rattiyā (by night), itthiyā (by the woman), dhenuyā (by the cow), vadhuyā (by the daughter-in-law).9When forming “rattiyā” (by night), first the base “ratti” is put down, then the inflection ‘nā’ is employed. Then, by this sutta, ‘i’ of the feminine form “ratti” is named ‘pa’. Then the suttas “Pato yā”, etc., are applied.
What is the purpose of saying “mean feminine [gender]”? [To prevent the operation of this rule in examples such as] “isinā” (by the sage), “bhikkhunā” (by the bhikkhu) – [these are not named ‘pa’ since they are masculine].
What is the use of the name ‘pa’? [For the use of the name ‘pa’ in suttas such as] “Pato yā” (§112). After ‘pa’, [‘nā’, etc., are substituted by] ‘ya’.

9When forming “rattiyā” (by night), first the base “ratti” is put down, then the inflection ‘nā’ is employed. Then, by this sutta, ‘i’ of the feminine form “ratti” is named ‘pa’. Then the suttas “Pato yā”, etc., are applied.
60Kaccāyana Sutta. 177Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ā gho (207)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ā + gho = 2 words]

Ākāro yadā itthikhyo, tadā ghasañño hoti.

Saddhāya, kaññāya, vīṇāya, gaṅgāya, disāya, sālāya, mālāya, tulāya, dolāya, pabhāya, sobhāya, paññāya, karuṇāya, nāvāya, kapālikāya.

Ā ti kimatthaṃ? Rattiyā, itthiyā.

Itthikhyo ti kimatthaṃ? Satthārā desito ayaṃ dhammo.

Gha icc anena kvattho? Ghato nādīnaṃ.

‘Ā’ [is named] ‘gha’.
The letter ‘ā’, when it means feminine [gender], is named ‘gha’.
Examples: saddhāya (by/with confidence), kaññāya (by/with the girl), vīṇāya (by/with the lute), gaṅgāya (by/with the river Ganges), disāya (by/with the direction), sālāya (by/with the hall), mālāya (by/with the garland), tulāya (by/with the scale), dolāya (by the cradle), pabhāya (by/with the light), sobhāya (by/with the beauty), paññāya (by/with wisdom), karuṇāya (by/with compassion), nāvāya (by/with the boat), kapālikāya (by/with the small bowl).
When forming “saddhāya” (by/with confidence), etc., the base is put down as “saddhā”, etc. The inflection ‘nā’ is employed; then the ‘ā’ of “saddhā”, etc., is named ‘gha’, and the application of the other suttas follows.
What is the purpose of saying ‘ā’? [There is no application of this sutta in] “rattiyā”, “itthiyā” [because in these cases the letter is ‘i’ or ‘ī’, not ‘ā’].
What is the purpose of saying “means feminine [gender]”? [In the example] “Satthārā desito ayaṃ dhammo” (this Dhamma taught by the Teacher) [there is no application of this sutta because the word is masculine].
What is the use of the name ‘gha’? [For the use of the name ‘gha’ in suttas such as] “Ghato nādīnaṃ” (§111). After ‘ga’, [there is substitution by ‘āya’] of those [singular inflections] beginning with ‘nā’, etc.
61Kaccāyana Sutta. 86Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sāgamo se (208)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sa-āgamo + se = 2 words]

Sakārāgamo hoti se vibhattimhi.

Purisassa, aggissa, isissa, daṇḍissa, bhikkhussa, sayambhussa, abhibhussa.

Se ti kimatthaṃ? Purisasmiṃ.

When ‘sa’ [follows], [there is] insertion of ‘s’.
When the inflection ‘sa’ follows, there is insertion of ‘s’.
Example: purisassa = purisa + sa. By this sutta ‘s’ is inserted after the base. The rest are to be understood similarly.
What is the purpose of saying ‘se’? [There is no application of this sutta in the example] “purisasmiṃ” (in the man), [since the inflection is not ‘sa’ but ‘smiṃ’].
62Kaccāyana Sutta. 206Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Saṃ-sāsv ekavacanesu ca (209)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Saṃ-sāsu + ekavacanesu + ca = 3 words]

Saṃ-sāsu ekavacanesu vibhattādesesu sakārāgamo hoti.

Etissaṃ, etissā; imissaṃ, imissā; tissaṃ, tissā; tassaṃ, tassā; yassaṃ, yassā; amussaṃ, amussā.

Saṃ-sāsv iti kimatthaṃ? Agginā, pāṇinā.

Ekavacanesv iti kimatthaṃ? Tāsaṃ, sabbāsaṃ.

Vibhattādesesv iti kimatthaṃ? Manasā, vacasā, thāmasā.

And when the singular ‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’ [follow].
When ‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’, which are substitutions of the singular inflections [‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’], follow, there is insertion of ‘s’.10‘Saṃ’ and ‘sā’ are substitutions of the inflections ‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’ respectively, after pronouns named ‘gha’ and ‘pa’ (see §179 · Gha-pato smiṃ-sānaṃ saṃ-sā — ‘Saṃ’ and ‘sā’ of ‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’ after ‘gha’ and ‘pa’.">§179). This sutta prescribes the additional insertion of ‘s’ before those substitutions.

  1. Etissaṃ = etā + smiṃ (‘ā’ of “etā” is substituted by ‘i’ (§63); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘saṃ’ (§179) and ‘s’ is inserted (§62)). Meaning: “in that”. [Feminine gender.]
  2. Etissā = etā + sa (‘ā’ of “etā” is substituted by ‘i’ (§63); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘sā’ (§179) and ‘s’ is inserted (§62)). Meaning: “of that”. [Feminine gender.]
  3. The rest (imissaṃ, imissā; tissaṃ, tissā; tassaṃ, tassā; yassaṃ, yassā; amussaṃ, amussā) are to be understood similarly.

What is the purpose of saying “‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘saṃ’ or ‘sā’, such as in] “agginā” (with fire) and “pāṇinā” (with the hand).

What is the purpose of saying “singular”? [This sutta does not apply when the words are not singular, such as in] tāsaṃ (of those) and sabbāsaṃ (of all).

What is the purpose of saying “which are substitutions of inflections”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no substitutions of inflections, such as in] manasā (with the mind), vacasā (with speech) and thāmasā (with strength).


10‘Saṃ’ and ‘sā’ are substitutions of the inflections ‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’ respectively, after pronouns named ‘gha’ and ‘pa’ (see §179). This sutta prescribes the additional insertion of ‘s’ before those substitutions.
63Kaccāyana Sutta. 217Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Et’-imāsam i (210)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Etā-imāsaṃ + i = 2 words]

Etā-imā icc etesam anto saro ikāro hoti saṃ-sāsu ekavacanesu vibhattādesesu.

Etissaṃ, etissā; imissaṃ, imissā.

Saṃ-sāsv iti kimatthaṃ? Etāya, imāya.

Ekavacanesv iti kimatthaṃ? Etāsaṃ, imāsaṃ.

‘I’ of “etā” and “imā”.
When ‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’, which are substitutions of the singular inflections [‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’], follow, the end vowel ‘ā’ of “etā” and “imā” is substituted by ‘i’.
Examples: the same as the previous sutta.
What is the purpose of saying “‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘saṃ’ or ‘sā’, such as in] etāya and imāya.
What is the purpose of saying “singular”? [This sutta does not apply when the words are not singular, such as in] etāsaṃ and imāsaṃ.
64Kaccāyana Sutta. 216Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tassā vā (211)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tassā + vā = 2 words]

Tassā itthiyaṃ vattamānāya ākārassa ikāro hoti vā saṃ-sāsu ekavacanesu vibhattādesesu.

Tissaṃ, tissā; tassaṃ, tassā.

Optionally, [‘ā’] of “tā”.
Optionally, when ‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’, which are substitutions of the singular inflections [‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’], follow, the [end vowel] ‘ā’ of “tā”, in the feminine [gender], is substituted by ‘i’.

  1. Tissaṃ = tā + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘saṃ’ (§179); ‘ā’ of “tā” is substituted by ‘i’ (§64) and ‘s’ is inserted (§62)).
  2. Tissā = tā + sa (‘sa’ is substituted by ‘sā’ (§179); ‘ā’ of “tā” is substituted by ‘i’ (§64) and ‘s’ is inserted (§62)).
65Kaccāyana Sutta. 215Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tato sassa ssāya (212)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tato + sassa + ssāya = 3 words]

Tato tā-etā-imāto sassa vibhattissa ssāyādeso hoti vā.

Tissāya, etissāya, imissāya.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Tissā, etissā, imissā.

After ‘tā’, ‘ssāya’ of ‘sa’.
Optionally, after “tā”, “etā” and “imā”, the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘ssāya’.

  1. Tissāya = tā + sa (‘ā’ of “tā” is substituted by ‘i’ (§64); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘ssāya’ (§65)).
  2. Etissāya = etā + sa (‘ā’ of “etā” is substituted by ‘i’ (§63); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘ssāya’ (§65)).
  3. Imissāya = imā + sa (‘ā’ of “imā” is substituted by ‘i’ (§63); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘ssāya’ (§65)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [In the following examples ‘sa’ is not substituted by ‘ssāya’:] tissā, etissā, imissā.

66Kaccāyana Sutta. 205Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Gho rassaṃ (213)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Gho + rassaṃ = 2 words]

Gho rassam āpajjate saṃ-sāsu ekavacanesu vibhattādesesu.

Tassaṃ, tassā; yassaṃ, yassā; sabbassaṃ, sabbassā.

Saṃ-sāsv iti kimatthaṃ? Tāya, sabbāya.

Ekavacanesv iti kimatthaṃ? Tāsaṃ, sabbāsaṃ.

‘Gha’ [becomes short].
When ‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’, which are substitutions of the singular inflections [‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’], follow, ‘gha’ becomes short.

  1. Tassaṃ = tā + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘saṃ’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘ā’ of “tā” is shortened (§66)).
  2. Tassā = tā + sa (‘sa’ is substituted by ‘sā’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘ā’ of “tā” is shortened (§66)).
  3. Yassaṃ = yā + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘saṃ’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘ā’ of “yā” is shortened (§66)).
  4. Yassā = yā + sa (‘sa’ is substituted by ‘sā’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘ā’ of “yā” is shortened (§66)).
  5. Sabbassaṃ = sabbā + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘saṃ’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘ā’ of “sabbā” is shortened (§66)).
  6. Sabbassā = sabbā + sa (‘sa’ is substituted by ‘sā’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘ā’ of “sabbā” is shortened (§66)).

What is the purpose of saying “‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘saṃ’ or ‘sā’, such as in] tāya, sabbāya.

What is the purpose of saying “singular”? [This sutta does not apply when the words are not singular, such as in] tāsaṃ, sabbāsaṃ.

67Kaccāyana Sutta. 229Rūpasiddhi Sutta.No ca dvādito naṃmhi (214)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[No + ca + dvi-ādito + naṃmhi = 4 words]

Dvi icc evamādito saṅkhyāto nakārāgamo hoti naṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Dvinnaṃ, tinnaṃ, catunnaṃ, pañcannaṃ, channaṃ, sattannaṃ, aṭṭhannaṃ, navannaṃ, dasannaṃ.

Dvādito ti kimatthaṃ? Sahassānaṃ.

Naṃmhi ti kimatthaṃ? Dvīsu, tīsu.

Caggahaṇena ssañ c’ āgamo hoti. Catassannaṃ itthīnaṃ; tissannaṃ vedanānaṃ.

And when ‘naṃ’ [follows], after “dvi” and others, [there is insertion of] ‘n’.
After the numerals “dvi” (two) and others, the letter ‘n’ is inserted when the inflection ‘naṃ’ follows.

  1. Dvinnaṃ (of two) = dvi + naṃ (by this sutta ‘n’ is inserted).
  2. Tinnaṃ (of three), catunnaṃ (of four), pañcannaṃ (of five), channaṃ (of six), sattannaṃ (of seven), aṭṭhannaṃ (of eight), navannaṃ (of nine), dasannaṃ (of ten). The formation of these numerals is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “‘dvi’ and others”? [This sutta does not apply to higher numbers such as] sahassānaṃ (of thousands).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘naṃ’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘naṃ’ does not follow, such as in] dvīsu (in two), tīsu (in three).

And by taking “ca”, ‘ssa’ is also inserted.

  1. Catassannaṃ = catu + naṃ (‘u’ of “catu” is substituted by ‘a’ (§404); by “ca” of this sutta ‘ssa’ is inserted). Catassannaṃ itthīnaṃ (of four women).
  2. Tissannaṃ = ti + naṃ (by “ca” of this sutta ‘ssa’ is inserted). Tissannaṃ vedanānaṃ (of three feelings).
68Kaccāyana Sutta. 184Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Am-ā pato smiṃ-smānaṃ vā (216)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Aṃ-ā + pato + smiṃ-smānaṃ + vā = 4 words]

Pa icc etasmā smiṃ smā icc etesaṃ aṃ-ā ādesā honti vā yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Matyaṃ, matiyaṃ, matyā (Khu. vi, 39)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 39, matiyā. Nikatyaṃ, nikatiyaṃ (Khu. vi, 39)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 39, nikatyā (Khu. v, 9)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 9, nikatiyā. Vikatyaṃ, vikatiyaṃ, vikatyā, vikatiyā. Viratyaṃ, viratiyaṃ, viratyā, viratiyā. Ratyaṃ, ratiyaṃ, ratyā (Khu. vi, 315)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 315, ratiyā. Puthabyaṃ, puthaviyaṃ, puthabyā, puthaviyā. Pavatyaṃ, pavatyā, pavattiyaṃ, pavattiyā.

Optionally, after ‘pa’, ‘aṃ’ and ‘ā’ of ‘smiṃ’ and ‘smā’.
Optionally, after ‘pa’, ‘smiṃ’ and ‘smā’ are substituted by ‘aṃ’ and ‘ā’ respectively.

  1. Matyaṃ = mati + smiṃ (‘i’ of “mati” is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§68); ‘i’ of “mati” is substituted by ‘y’ (§72)).
  2. Matyā = mati + smā (‘i’ of “mati” is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§68); ‘i’ of “mati” is substituted by ‘y’ (§72)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous ones.
69Kaccāyana Sutta. 186Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ādito o ca (218)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ādito + o + ca = 3 words]

Ādi icc etasmā smiṃ-vacanassa aṃ-o ādesā honti vā.

Ādiṃ, ādo.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Ādismiṃ, ādimhi nāthaṃ namassitvāna.

Caggahaṇena aññasmā pi smiṃvacanassa ā-o-aṃ ādesā honti. Divā ca ratto ca haranti ye baliṃ (Khu. i, 312)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 312. Bārāṇasiṃ ahu rājā (Khu. v, 380)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 380.

And ‘o’ after “ādi”.
Optionally, the inflection ‘smiṃ’ after “ādi” is substituted by ‘aṃ’ and ‘o’.

  1. Ādiṃ = ādi + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§69); ‘i’ of “ādi” is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘ṃ’ (§82)).
  2. Ādo = ādi + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§69); ‘i’ of “ādi” is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [This sutta does not apply in:] ādismiṃ, ādimhi nāthaṃ namassitvāna (having paid homage to the Lord, in the beginning).

And by taking “ca”, also after other words ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ā’, ‘o’ and ‘aṃ’.

  1. Divā = divā + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§69); ‘ā’ of “divā” is elided (§83)).
  2. Ratto = ratti + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§69); ‘i’ of “ratti” is elided (§83)).
  3. Bārāṇasiṃ = Bārāṇasī + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§69); ‘ī’ of “Bārāṇasī” is shortened (§84); ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘ṃ’ (§82)).

“Divā ca ratto ca haranti ye baliṃ” (those who by day and by night bring offerings). “Bārāṇasiṃ ahu rājā” (there was a king in Vārāṇasī).

70Kaccāyana Sutta. 30Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Jha-lānam iy’-uvā sare vā (220)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Jha-lānaṃ + iya-uvā + sare + vā = 4 words]

Jha la icc etesaṃ iya uva icc ete ādesā honti vā sare pare yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Tiyantaṃ pacchiyāgāre, aggiyāgāre, bhikkhuvāsane nisīdati, puthuvāsane nisīdati.

Sare ti kimatthaṃ? Timalaṃ, tiphalaṃ, ticatukkaṃ, tidaṇḍaṃ, tilokaṃ, tinayanaṃ, tipāsaṃ, tihaṃsaṃ, tibhavaṃ, tikhandhaṃ, tipiṭakaṃ, tivedanaṃ, catuddisaṃ, puthubhūtaṃ.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Pañcah’ aṅgehi (Vin. v, 343)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. v, p. 343, tīhākārehi. Cakkh’ āyatanaṃ (Abhi. iii, 5)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 5.

Vā ti vikappanatthaṃ? Ikārassa ayādeso hoti. Vatthuttayaṃ.

When a vowel follows, optionally, [there are] ‘iya’ and ‘uva’ of ‘jha’ and ‘la’.
Optionally, when a vowel follows, ‘jha’ and ‘la’ are substituted by ‘iya’ and ‘uva’ respectively.11Note: i ī → iya; u ū → uva

  1. Tiyantaṃ = ti + antaṃ (‘i’ of ‘ti’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘i’ is substituted by ‘iya’ (§70); ‘a’ of ‘iya’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Bhikkhuvāsane = bhikkhu + āsane (‘u’ of “bhikkhu” is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘u’ is substituted by ‘uva’ (§70); ‘a’ of ‘uva’ is elided (§83)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous ones.

What is the purpose of saying “when a vowel follows”? [This sutta does not apply when a vowel does not follow, such as in] timalaṃ, tiphalaṃ, ticatukkaṃ, tidaṇḍaṃ, tilokaṃ, tinayanaṃ, tipāsaṃ, tihaṃsaṃ, tibhavaṃ, tikhandhaṃ, tipiṭakaṃ, tivedanaṃ, catuddisaṃ, puthubhūtaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [This sutta does not apply in] pañcah’ aṅgehi, tīhākārehi, cakkh’ āyatanaṃ.

“Vā” is used in the meaning of alternative (vikappana). [By that “vā”] the letter ‘i’ is substituted by ‘aya’. Vatthuttayaṃ = vatthutti + si (by “vā” of this sutta, ‘i’ of ‘ti’ is substituted by ‘aya’; ‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’).


11Note: i ī → iya; u ū → uva
71Kaccāyana Sutta. 505Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ya-vakārā ca (221)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ya-vakārā + ca = 2 words]

Jha-lānaṃ yakāra-vākārādesā honti sare pare yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Agyāgāraṃ (Vin. iii, 33)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 33; cakkh’ āyatanaṃ (Abhi. iii, 5)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 5; svāgataṃ (Khu. v, 300)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 300; te mahāvīra.

Caggahaṇaṃ sampiṇḍanatthaṃ.

And the letters ‘ya’ and ‘va’.
When a vowel follows, ‘jha’ and ‘la’ are substituted by ‘ya’ and ‘va’ respectively.

  1. Agyāgāraṃ = aggi + āgāraṃ (‘i’ of “aggi” is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘i’ is substituted by ‘ya’ (§71); ‘a’ of ‘ya’ is elided (§83); ‘g’ of “aggi” is also elided (§41)).
  2. Svāgataṃ = su + āgataṃ (‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘u’ is substituted by ‘va’ (§71); ‘a’ of ‘va’ is elided (§83)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous ones.

“Ca” is used in the meaning of collecting (sampiṇḍana).12“Ca” means here sampiṇḍana (collecting), since both this sutta and §70 · Jha-lānam iy’-uvā sare vā — When a vowel follows, optionally, [there are] ‘iya’ and ‘uva’ of ‘jha’ and ‘la’.">§70 have a similar function: in §70 · Jha-lānam iy’-uvā sare vā — When a vowel follows, optionally, [there are] ‘iya’ and ‘uva’ of ‘jha’ and ‘la’.">§70, ‘jha’ and ‘la’ are substituted by ‘iya’ and ‘uva’; in this sutta, by ‘ya’ and ‘va’. The “ca” gathers both operations as a set. Ref. Ven. A. Thitzana.


12“Ca” means here sampiṇḍana (collecting), since both this sutta and §70 have a similar function: in §70, ‘jha’ and ‘la’ are substituted by ‘iya’ and ‘uva’; in this sutta, by ‘ya’ and ‘va’. The “ca” gathers both operations as a set. Ref. Ven. A. Thitzana.
72Kaccāyana Sutta. 185Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Pasaññassa ca (222)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Pa-saññassa + ca = 2 words]

Pasaññassa ca ivaṇṇassa vibhattādese sare pare yakārādeso hoti.

Puthabyā; ratyā (Khu. vi, 315)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 315; matyā (Khu. vi, 39)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 39.

Sare ti kimatthaṃ? Puthaviyaṃ.

And of those named ‘pa’.
And when the vowel [‘ā’] which is the substitution of the inflection [‘smā’] follows, ‘i’ and ‘ī’, named ‘pa’, are substituted by ‘ya’.

  1. Puthabyā = puthavī + smā (‘ī’ of “puthavī” is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§68); ‘ī’ is substituted by ‘ya’ (§72); ‘v’ is substituted by ‘b’ (§20)).
  2. The formation of ratyā and matyā is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “when a vowel follows”? [This sutta does not apply when a vowel does not follow, such as in] puthaviyaṃ.

73Kaccāyana Sutta. 174Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Gāva se (224)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Go + āva + se = 3 words]

Go icc etassa okārassa āvādeso hoti se vibhattimhi.

Gāvassa.

When ‘sa’ [follows], ‘āva’ of [‘o’ of] “go”.
When the inflection ‘sa’ follows, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’.

  1. Gāvassa = go + sa (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’ (§73) and ‘s’ is inserted (§61)).
74Kaccāyana Sutta. 169Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yosu ca (224)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yosu + ca = 2 words]

Go icc etassa okārassa āvādeso hoti yo icc etesu paresu.

Gāvo gacchanti; gāvo passanti; gāvī gacchanti; gāvī passanti.

Caggahaṇaṃ kimatthaṃ? Nā-smā-smiṃ-suvacanesu āvādeso hoti.

Gāvena, gāvā, gāve, gāvesu.

And when [any of the three]13First plural inflection, second plural inflection and vocative plural. ‘yo’ follow.
When [any of the three] ‘yo’ follow, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’.

  1. Gāvo = go + yo (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’ (§74); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (“tu” in §205); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of taking “ca”? [By taking “ca”, there is the substitution ‘āva’] also when ‘nā’, ‘smā’, ‘smiṃ’ and ‘su’ follow.

  1. Gāvena = go + nā (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’ by “ca” of this sutta (§74); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ena’ (§103); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).
  2. Gāvā = go + smā (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’ by “ca” of this sutta (§74); ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§108); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).
  3. Gāve = go + smiṃ (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’ by “ca” of this sutta (§74); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§108); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).
  4. Gāvesu = go + su (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’ by “ca” of this sutta (§74); ‘a’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).

13First plural inflection, second plural inflection and vocative plural.
75Kaccāyana Sutta. 170Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Av’ aṃmhi ca (224)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ava + aṃ-mhi + ca = 3 words]

Go icc etassa okārassa āva ava icc ete ādesā honti aṃ-mhi vibhattimhi.

Caggahaṇena sādisesesu pubbuttavacanesu go icc etassa okārassa avādeso hoti.

Gāvaṃ, gavaṃ. Gavassa, gavo, gavena, gavā, gave, gavesu.

And when ‘aṃ’ follows, ‘ava’.
When the inflection ‘aṃ’ follows, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’ and ‘ava’.

  1. Gāvaṃ = go + aṃ (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’ (§75); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).
  2. Gavaṃ = go + aṃ (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§75); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).

By taking “ca”, when the remaining inflections beginning with ‘sa’ mentioned in the previous [two] suttas follow, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’.

  1. Gavassa = go + sa (by “ca” of this sutta, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§75); ‘s’ is inserted (§61)).
  2. Gavo = go + yo (by “ca” of this sutta, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§75); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (“tu” in §205); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).
  3. Gavena = go + nā (by “ca” of this sutta, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§75); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ena’ (§103); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).
  4. Gavā = go + smā (by “ca” of this sutta, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§75); ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§108); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).
  5. Gave = go + smiṃ (by “ca” of this sutta, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§75); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§108); ‘a’ is elided (§12)).
  6. Gavesu = go + su (by “ca” of this sutta, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§75); ‘a’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
76Kaccāyana Sutta. 171Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Āvass’ u vā (226)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Āvassa + u + vā = 3 words]

Āva icc etassa gāvādesassa antasarassa ukārādeso hoti vā aṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Gāvuṃ, gāvaṃ.

Āvasse ti kimatthaṃ? Gavaṃ.

Aṃmhi ti kimatthaṃ? Gāvo tiṭṭhanti.

Optionally, ‘u’ of ‘āva’.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘aṃ’ follows, the end vowel of ‘āva’ –which is the substitution of “go”– is substituted by ‘u’.

  1. Gāvuṃ = go + aṃ (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘āva’ (§73); ‘a’ of ‘āva’ is substituted by ‘u’ (§76); ‘aṃ’ is substituted by ‘ṃ’ (§82)).
  2. Gāvaṃ = no application of this rule.

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘āva’”? [This sutta does not apply in] gavaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘aṃ’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘aṃ’ does not follow, such as in] gāvo tiṭṭhanti.

77Kaccāyana Sutta. 175Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tato naṃ aṃ patimh’ ālutte ca samāse (227-8)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tato + naṃ + aṃ + patimhi + ālutte + ca + samāse = 7 words]

Tato gosaddato naṃvacanassa aṃādeso hoti, go icc etassa okārassa avādeso hoti patimhi pare ālutte ca samāse.

Gavaṃpati (S. iii, 382)Saṃyutta-nikāya · vol. iii, p. 382.

Alutte ti kimatthaṃ? Gopati.

Caggahaṇena asamāse pi naṃvacanassa aṃādeso hoti, go icc etassa okārassa avādeso hoti.

Gavaṃ.

After that [“go”], when ‘pati’ follows in a compound with [the inflection] not elided, ‘aṃ’ of ‘naṃ’.
When there is a compound with [the inflection] not elided (alutta-samāsa), and when ‘pati’ follows, after the word “go” the inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ and ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’.

  1. Gavaṃpati = gonaṃ + pati (‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§77); ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§77); ‘a’ of ‘ava’ is elided (§12)).

What is the purpose of saying “in a compound with [the inflection] not elided”? [This sutta does not apply when there is a compound with elision of the inflection, such as in] gopati.

And by taking “ca”, also when there is no compound, ‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ and ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’.

  1. Gavaṃ = go + naṃ (‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§77); ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§77)).
78Kaccāyana Sutta. 31Rūpasiddhi Sutta.O sare ca (229)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[O + sare + ca = 3 words]

Go icc etassa okārassa avādeso hoti samāse ca sare pare.

Gavassakaṃ, gaveḷakaṃ, gavājinaṃ.

Caggahaṇena uvaṇṇa icc evam antānaṃ liṅgānaṃ uva-ava-urādesā honti smiṃ-yo icc etesu kvaci.

Bhuvi, pasavo, guravo, caturo (Khu. i, 293)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 293.

Sare ti kimatthaṃ? Godhano, govindho (D. ii, 186)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 186.

And when a vowel follows, ‘o’.
When there is a compound and a vowel follows, ‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’.

  1. Gavassakaṃ = go + assakaṃ (‘o’ of “go” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§78); ‘a’ of ‘ava’ is elided (§12)).

And by taking “ca”, when ‘smiṃ’ and ‘yo’ follow, sometimes the bases ending in ‘u’ and ‘ū’ are substituted by ‘uva’, ‘ava’ and ‘ura’.

  1. Bhuvi = bhū + smiṃ (by “ca” of this sutta, ‘ū’ of “bhū” is substituted by ‘uva’ (§78); by “tato” of §206 ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’; ‘a’ of ‘uva’ is elided (§12)).
  2. Pasavo = pasu + yo (by “ca” of this sutta, ‘u’ of “pasu” is substituted by ‘ava’ (§78); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (“tu” in §205); ‘a’ of ‘ava’ is elided (§12)).
  3. Caturo = catu + yo (by “ca” of this sutta, ‘u’ is substituted by ‘ura’ (§78); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (“tu” in §205); ‘a’ of ‘ura’ is elided (§12)).

What is the purpose of saying “when a vowel follows”? [This sutta does not apply when a vowel does not follow, such as in] godhano, govindho.

79Kaccāyana Sutta. 46Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tabbiparītūpapade byañjane ca
[Tabbiparīto + upapade + byañjane + ca = 4 words]

Tassa avasaddassa yadā upapade tiṭṭhamānassa tassa okārassa viparīto hoti byañjane pare.

Uggate sūriye; uggacchati; uggahetvā.

Caggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ. Avasāne, avakiraṇe, avakirati.

And when [‘ava’] is the preceding member (upapada) and a consonant follows, [there is] reversion of that.
When the word ‘ava’ is the preceding member (upapada) and a consonant follows, ‘o’ of ‘ava’ is reversed [into ‘u’].14‘Ava’ is one of the twenty prefixes (upasagga). The term “viparīta” –change, reversion; transformation– is the name given to the letter ‘o’ which is the transformation of the prefix ‘ava’, and to the letter ‘u’ which is the transformation of the letter ‘o’. E.g., in “ava-gacchati”, he goes down, the prefix ‘ava’ becomes ‘o’ (o-gacchati) and afterwards this becomes ‘u’ (u-gacchati); (Kac. §79 · Tabbiparītūpapade byañjane ca — And when [‘ava’] is the preceding member (*upapada*) and a consonant follows, [there is] reversion of that.">§79, Rū. §45-46, Sad. iii §25-26).

  1. Uggate = ava + gate (‘ava’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§50); then ‘o’ becomes ‘u’ (§79); ‘g’ of “gate” is doubled (§20)).15Note: both changes, ‘ava’ → ‘o’ and ‘o’ → ‘u’, are called viparīta (transformation).

“Ca” is for [delimiting the application of] this rule, [which does not apply in] avasāne, avakiraṇe, avakirati.


14‘Ava’ is one of the twenty prefixes (upasagga). The term “viparīta” –change, reversion; transformation– is the name given to the letter ‘o’ which is the transformation of the prefix ‘ava’, and to the letter ‘u’ which is the transformation of the letter ‘o’. E.g., in “ava-gacchati”, he goes down, the prefix ‘ava’ becomes ‘o’ (o-gacchati) and afterwards this becomes ‘u’ (u-gacchati); (Kac. §79, Rū. §45-46, Sad. iii §25-26).
15Note: both changes, ‘ava’ → ‘o’ and ‘o’ → ‘u’, are called viparīta (transformation).
80Kaccāyana Sutta. 173Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Goṇa naṃmhi vā (231)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Goṇa + naṃmhi + vā = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva gosaddassa goṇādeso hoti vā naṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Goṇānaṃ sattannaṃ.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Gonañ ce taramānānaṃ, ujuṃ gacchati puṅgavo. Sabbā gāvī ujuṃ yanti, nette ujuṃ gate sati.

Yogavibhāgena aññatrā pi goṇādeso hoti.

Goṇabhūtānaṃ.

Optionally, when ‘naṃ’ follows, “goṇa”.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘naṃ’ follows, the whole word “go” is substituted by “goṇa”.

  1. Goṇānaṃ = go + naṃ (“go” is substituted by “goṇa” (§80); ‘a’ of “goṇa” is lengthened (§89)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [This sutta does not apply in:] “Gonañ ce taramānānaṃ, ujuṃ gacchati puṅgavo. Sabbā gāvī ujuṃ yanti, nette ujuṃ gate sati”. (When the leader of the crossing cattle goes straight, all the cows go straight when the leader goes straight.)

By dividing the sutta, in other contexts there is also the substitution by “goṇa”: goṇabhūtānaṃ.

81Kaccāyana Sutta. 172Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Su-hi-nāsu ca (231-2)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Su-hi-nāsu + ca = 2 words]

Su hi nā icc etesu sabbassa gosaddassa goṇādeso hoti vā.

Goṇesu, goṇehi, goṇebhi, goṇena.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Gosu, gohi, gobhi, gavena.

Caggahaṇena syādisesesu pubbuttaravacanesu pi goṇa-gu-gavayādesā honti. Goṇo, goṇā, goṇaṃ, goṇe, goṇassa, goṇamhā. Goṇamhi, gunnaṃ, gavayehi, gavayebhi.

And when ‘su’, ‘hi’ and ‘nā’ follow.
Optionally, when ‘su’, ‘hi’ and ‘nā’ follow, the whole word “go” is substituted by “goṇa”.

  1. Goṇesu = go + su (“go” is substituted by “goṇa” (§81); ‘a’ of “goṇa” is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [This sutta does not apply in] gosu, gohi, gobhi, gavena.

And by taking “ca”, when the remaining inflections, ‘si’ and others, mentioned before and after, follow, there are also the substitutions by “goṇa”, “gu” and “gavaya”.

  1. Goṇo = go + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104); “go” is substituted by “goṇa” (§81); ‘a’ of “goṇa” is elided (§12)).
  2. Gunnaṃ = go + naṃ (“go” is substituted by “gu” (§81); ‘n’ is inserted (§28)).
  3. Gavayehi = go + hi (“go” is substituted by “gavaya” (§81); ‘a’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§108)).
82Kaccāyana Sutta. 149Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Aṃ-mo niggahitaṃ jha-la-pehi (235)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Aṃ-mo + niggahitaṃ + jha-la-pehi = 3 words]

Aṃvacanassa, makārassa ca jha la pa icc etehi niggahitaṃ hoti.

Aggiṃ, isiṃ, gahapatiṃ, daṇḍiṃ, mahesiṃ, bhikkhuṃ, paṭuṃ, sayambhuṃ, abhibhuṃ, rattiṃ, itthiṃ, vadhuṃ, pulliṅgaṃ, pumbhāvo, puṅkokilo.

Aṃ-mo ti kimatthaṃ? Agginā, pāṇinā, bhikkhunā, rattiyā, itthiyā, vadhuyā.

Jha-la-pehī ti kimatthaṃ? Sukhaṃ, dukkhaṃ.

Pun’ ārambhaggahaṇaṃ vibhāsanivattanatthaṃ. Aggiṃ, paṭuṃ, buddhiṃ, vadhuṃ.

After ‘jha’, ‘la’ and ‘pa’, niggahita [of] ‘aṃ’ and ‘ma’.
After ‘jha’, ‘la’ and ‘pa’, ‘aṃ’ and ‘ma’ become niggahita (ṃ).

  1. Aggiṃ = aggi + aṃ (‘i’ of “aggi” is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘ṃ’ (§82)).
  2. Rattiṃ = ratti + aṃ (‘i’ of “ratti” is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘ṃ’ (§82)).
  3. Pulliṅgaṃ = puma + liṅgaṃ (‘ma’ of “puma” becomes ‘ṃ’ (§82); ‘ṃ’ becomes ‘l’ (§31); ‘l’ is doubled (§28)).

What is the purpose of saying “‘aṃ’ and ‘ma’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘aṃ’ or ‘ma’, such as in] agginā, pāṇinā, bhikkhunā, rattiyā, itthiyā, vadhuyā.

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘jha’, ‘la’ and ‘pa’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘jha’, ‘la’ or ‘pa’, such as in] sukhaṃ, dukkhaṃ.

Taking again “jha-la-pehi” is to prevent “vā” from following up to here.16To prevent the application of the optional rule (vibhāsa-nivattana) here. Examples: aggiṃ, paṭuṃ, buddhiṃ, vadhuṃ.


16To prevent the application of the optional rule (vibhāsa-nivattana) here.
83Kaccāyana Sutta. 67Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Saralopo ’mādesa-paccayādimhi saralope tu pakati (236)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sara-lopo + aṃ-ādesa-paccaya-ādimhi + saralope + tu + pakati = 5 words]

Saralopo hoti amādesa-paccayādimhi, saralope tu pakati hoti.

Purisaṃ, purise, pāpaṃ, pāpe, pāpiyo, pāpiṭṭho.

Amādesapaccayādimhī ti kimatthaṃ? Appamādo amataṃ padaṃ (Khu. i, 16)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 16.

Saralope ti kimatthaṃ? Purisassa, daṇḍinaṃ.

Tuggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ? Bhikkhunī, gahapatānī.

Pakatiggahaṇasāmatthena puna sandhibhāvo ca hoti. Seyyo (Khu. i, 29)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 29; seṭṭho (Vin. i, 4)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. i, p. 4; jeyyo; jeṭṭho (D. ii, 13)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 13.

When ‘aṃ’, a substitution, a suffix, etc., follow, [there is] elision of the vowel; when there is elision of the vowel, [the remaining vowel remains] natural.
When [the inflection] ‘aṃ’, a substitution, a suffix, etc., follow, there is elision of the vowel; and when there is elision of the vowel, [the remaining vowel] remains natural.17“Remains natural” (pakati) means that the vowel does not change.18Note: “Remains natural” (pakati) means that the vowel does not change.

  1. Purisaṃ = purisa + aṃ (because of ‘aṃ’, there is elision of the vowel ‘a’ of “purisa” (§83); ‘a’ of ‘aṃ’ does not change (§83)).
  2. Pāpiyo = pāpa + iya (‘a’ of “pāpa” is elided (§83); ‘i’ of ‘iya’ does not change (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘aṃ’, a substitution, a suffix, etc., [follow]”? [This sutta does not apply when that does not happen, such as in] “Appamādo amataṃ padaṃ”.19Note: Here the initial ‘a’ of “amataṃ” is not the inflection ‘aṃ’, nor a substitution, nor a suffix; therefore this rule does not operate.

What is the purpose of saying “when there is elision of the vowel”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no vowel to elide, such as in] purisassa, daṇḍinaṃ.

‘Tu’ is for preventing the operation of this rule in “bhikkhunī”, “gahapatānī”.

  1. Bhikkhunī = bhikkhu + inī (here ‘i’ of ‘inī’ is elided (§13)).
  2. Gahapatānī = gahapati + inī (‘i’ of ‘pati’ is substituted by ‘a’ (§91); ‘i’ of ‘inī’ is elided (§13); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§16)).

Taking again “pakati”, there is also sandhi: seyyo, seṭṭho, jeyyo, jeṭṭho.20The procedure of euphonic combination involves substituting ‘i’ by ‘e’ and doubling ‘y’.


17“Remains natural” (pakati) means that the vowel does not change.
18Note: “Remains natural” (pakati) means that the vowel does not change.
19Note: Here the initial ‘a’ of “amataṃ” is not the inflection ‘aṃ’, nor a substitution, nor a suffix; therefore this rule does not operate.
20The procedure of euphonic combination involves substituting ‘i’ by ‘e’ and doubling ‘y’.
84Kaccāyana Sutta. 144Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Agho rassam ekavacanayosv api ca (237-8)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Agho + rassaṃ + ekavacana-yosu + api + ca = 5 words]

Agho saro rassam āpajjate ekavacana-yo icc etesu.

Itthiṃ, itthiyo, itthiyā. Vadhuṃ, vadhuyo, vadhuyā. Daṇḍiṃ, daṇḍino, daṇḍinā. Sayambhuṃ, sayambhuvo, sayambhunā.

Agho ti kimatthaṃ? Kaññaṃ, kaññāyo, kaññāya.

Ekavacanayosv iti kimatthaṃ? Itthīhi, sayambhūhi.

Caggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ? Nadiṃ, nadīyo, nadiyā.

Apiggahaṇena na rassam āpajjate. Itthī, bhikkhunī.

And also when the singular [number] and ‘yo’ follow, non-‘gha’ [is shortened].
When the singular [inflection] and ‘yo’ follow, the vowel that is not ‘gha’ is shortened.

  1. Itthiṃ = itthī + aṃ (‘ī’ of “itthī” is shortened (§84); ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘ṃ’ (§82)).
  2. Itthiyo = itthī + yo (‘ī’ of “itthī” is shortened (§84)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous ones.

What is the purpose of saying “non-‘gha’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is ‘gha’, such as in] kaññaṃ, kaññāyo, kaññāya.

What is the purpose of saying “when the singular [number] and ‘yo’ [follow]”? [This sutta does not apply when that is not the case, such as in] itthīhi, sayambhūhi.

“Ca” is for emphasis.

By taking “api”, there is no shortening.

  1. Itthī = itthī + si (‘ī’ is not shortened because of “api” in this sutta (§84); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
85Kaccāyana Sutta. 150Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Na sismim anapuṃsakāni (239-48)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Na + sismim + anapuṃsakāni = 3 words]

Sismiṃ anapuṃsakāni liṅgāni na rassam āpajjante.

Itthī, bhikkhunī, vadhū, daṇḍī, sayambhū.

Sismiṃ ti kimatthaṃ? Bhoti itthi, bothi vadhu, bho daṇḍi, bho sayambhu.

Anapuṃsakānī ti kimatthaṃ? Sukhakāri dānaṃ, sukhakāri sīlaṃ, sīghayāyi cittaṃ.

When ‘si’ follows, the non-neuters, not [shortened].
When ‘si’ follows, the non-neuter bases are not shortened.

  1. Itthī = itthī + si (‘ī’ is not shortened; ‘si’ is elided (§220)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘si’ [follows]”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘si’ does not follow, such as in] “bhoti itthi”, etc.21These examples do not correspond to the first inflection ‘si’ but to the ‘si’ of the vocative.

  1. Itthi = itthī + si (‘si’ is named ‘gha’ (§57); ‘ī’ is shortened (§245); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).

What is the purpose of saying “non-neuters”? [This sutta does not apply when they are neuter, such as in] “sukhakāri dānaṃ”, etc.

  1. Sukhakāri = sukhakārī + si (‘si’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened by this sutta (§85); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).

21These examples do not correspond to the first inflection ‘si’ but to the ‘si’ of the vocative.
86Kaccāyana Sutta. 227Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ubhādito nam innaṃ (341)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ubha-ādito + naṃ + innaṃ = 3 words]

Ubha icc evam ādito saṅkhyāto naṃvacanassa innaṃ hoti.

Ubhinnaṃ, duvinnaṃ.

Ubhādito ti kimatthaṃ? Ubhayesaṃ.

After “ubha” and others, ‘innaṃ’ [of] ‘naṃ’.
After the numerals “ubha” and others, the inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘innaṃ’.

  1. Ubhinnaṃ = ubha + naṃ (‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘innaṃ’ (§86); ‘a’ of “ubha” is elided (§83)).
  2. Duvinnaṃ = dvi + naṃ (‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘innaṃ’ (§86); by “ca” (§132) “dvi” is substituted by “duvi”; ‘i’ of “duvi” is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘ubha’ and others”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “ubha” and others, such as in] ubhayesaṃ.22Here the word is “ubhaya”.


22Here the word is “ubhaya”.
87Kaccāyana Sutta. 231Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Iṇṇam-iṇṇannaṃ tīhi saṅkhyāhi (243)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Iṇṇaṃ-iṇṇannaṃ + tīhi + saṅkhyāhi = 3 words]

Naṃvacanassa iṇṇaṃ iṇṇannaṃ icc ete ādesā honti tīhi saṅkhyāhi.

Tiṇṇaṃ, tiṇṇannaṃ.

Tīhī ti kimatthaṃ? Dvinnaṃ.

After the numeral “ti”, ‘iṇṇaṃ’ and ‘iṇṇannaṃ’ [of ‘naṃ’].
After the numeral “ti”, the inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘iṇṇaṃ’ and ‘iṇṇannaṃ’.

  1. Tiṇṇaṃ, tiṇṇannaṃ = ti + naṃ (‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘iṇṇaṃ’ and ‘iṇṇannaṃ’ (§87); ‘i’ of “ti” is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “after the numeral ‘ti’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘ti’, such as in] dvinnaṃ.

88Kaccāyana Sutta. 147Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yosu katanikāra-lopesu dīghaṃ (245)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yosu + kata-nikāra-lopesu + dīghaṃ = 3 words]

Sabbe sarā yosu katanikāra-lopesu dīgham āpajjante.

Aggī, bhikkhū, rattī, yāgū, aṭṭhī, aṭṭhīni, āyū, āyūni, sabbāni, yāni, tāni, kāni, katamāni, etāni, amūni, imāni.

Yosv iti kimatthaṃ? Aggi, bhikkhu, ratti, yāgu, sabbo, yo, so, ko, amuko.

Katanikāralopesv iti kimatthaṃ? Itthiyo, vadhuyo, sayambhuvo.

Pun’ ārambhaggahaṇaṃ kimatthaṃ? Niccadīpanatthaṃ. Aggī, bhikkhū, rattī, yāni, tāni, katamāni.

When ‘yo’ becomes ‘ni’ or is elided, long.
When ‘yo’ becomes ‘ni’ or is elided, all the vowels are lengthened.

  1. Aggī = aggi + yo (‘yo’ is elided (§118); ‘i’ is lengthened (§88)).
  2. Āyūni = āyu + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§217); ‘u’ is lengthened (§88)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘yo’ [follows]”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘yo’, such as in] aggi, bhikkhu, ratti, yāgu, sabbo, yo, so, ko, amuko.

What is the purpose of saying “when it becomes ‘ni’ or is elided”? [This sutta does not apply when it neither becomes ‘ni’ nor is elided, such as in] itthiyo, vadhuyo, sayambhuvo.

What is the purpose of taking this sutta again? To show that it is a fixed operation. Examples: aggī, bhikkhū, rattī, yāni, tāni, katamāni.

89Kaccāyana Sutta. 87Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Su-naṃ-hisu ca (246)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Su-naṃ-hisu + ca = 2 words]

Su naṃ hi icc etesu sabbe sarā dīgham āpajjante.

Aggīsu, aggīnaṃ, aggīhi; rattīsu, rattīnaṃ, rattīhi; bhikkhūsu, bhikkhūnaṃ, bhikkhūhi. Purisānaṃ.

Etesv iti kimatthaṃ? Agginā, pāṇinā, daṇḍinā.

Caggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ. Sukhettesu brahmacārisu (A. i, 352)Aṅguttara-nikāya · vol. i, p. 352; dhammam akkhāsi Bhagavā; bhikkhunaṃ datvā sakehi pāṇibhi (Khu. ii, 138)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 138.

And when ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘hi’ follow.
When ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘hi’ follow, all the vowels are lengthened.

  1. Aggīsu = aggi + su (‘i’ is lengthened (§89)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “when these follow”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘hi’ do not follow, such as in] agginā, pāṇinā, daṇḍinā.

“Ca” is for preventing [the application of this rule in the following cases].

  1. Brahmacārisu = brahmacāri + su (here ‘i’ is not lengthened, by “ca” (§89)).
  2. Bhikkhunaṃ = bhikkhu + naṃ (here ‘u’ is not lengthened).
  3. Pāṇibhi = pāṇi + hi (‘hi’ is substituted by ‘bhi’ (§99); ‘i’ is not lengthened, by “ca” (§89)).
90Kaccāyana Sutta. 252Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Pañcādīnam attaṃ (247)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Pañca-ādīnaṃ + attaṃ = 2 words]

Pañcādīnaṃ saṅkhyānaṃ anto attam āpajjate su naṃ hi icc etesu.

Pañcasu, pañcannaṃ, pañcahi; chasu, channaṃ, chahi; sattasu, sattannaṃ, sattahi; aṭṭhasu, aṭṭhannaṃ, aṭṭhahi; navasu, navannaṃ, navahi; dasasu, dasannaṃ, dasahi.

Pañcādīnamī ti kimatthaṃ? Dvīsu, dvinnaṃ, dvīhi.

Attam iti bhāvaniddeso ubhayassāgamanatthaṃ, anto ukāro attam āpajjate. Catassannaṃ itthīnaṃ. Tissannaṃ vedanānaṃ.

The state of ‘a’ of “pañca” and others.
When ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘hi’ follow, the end vowel of the numerals “pañca” and others remains ‘a’.

  1. Pañcasu = pañca + su (‘a’ remains ‘a’ (§90)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘pañca’ and others”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “pañca” and others, such as in] dvīsu, dvinnaṃ, dvīhi.

“Attaṃ”, which is an expression that indicates a state (bhāvaniddesa), has the purpose of inserting ‘ssa’ and changing the end ‘u’ into ‘a’.

  1. Catassannaṃ = catu + naṃ (‘ssa’ is inserted; ‘u’ becomes ‘a’ (§90)).
  2. Tissannaṃ = ti + naṃ (‘ssa’ is inserted (§90); ‘n’ is doubled (§28)).23Note: In the sutta it is said “pañcādīnam attaṃ” and not “pañcādīnam a”. “Attaṃ” = state of ‘a’; thus “attaṃ” is called bhāvaniddesa (an expression that indicates a state). The expression that indicates a state has the purpose of inserting ‘ssa’ and changing ‘u’ into ‘a’.

23Note: In the sutta it is said “pañcādīnam attaṃ” and not “pañcādīnam a”. “Attaṃ” = state of ‘a’; thus “attaṃ” is called bhāvaniddesa (an expression that indicates a state). The expression that indicates a state has the purpose of inserting ‘ssa’ and changing ‘u’ into ‘a’.
91Kaccāyana Sutta. 194Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Patiss’ inīmhi (248)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Patissa + inīmhi = 2 words]

Patiss’ anto attam āpajjate inīmhi paccaye pare.

Gahapatānī.

Inīmhi ti kimatthaṃ? Gahapati.

‘Inī’ of “pati”.
When the suffix ‘inī’ follows, the end vowel of “pati” becomes ‘a’.

  1. Gahapatānī = gahapati + inī (‘i’ of “gahapati” becomes ‘a’ (§91); ‘i’ of ‘inī’ is elided (§13); ‘a’ is lengthened (§16)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘inī’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘inī’ does not follow, such as in] gahapati.

92Kaccāyana Sutta. 100Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ntuss’ anto yosu ca (249)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ntussa + anto + yosu + ca = 4 words]

Ntupaccayassa anto attam āpajjate su naṃ hi yo icc etesu paresu.

Guṇavantesu, guṇavantānaṃ, guṇavantehi, guṇavantā, guṇavante.

Ntusse ti kimatthaṃ? Isīnaṃ.

Etesv iti kimatthaṃ? Guṇavā.

Caggahaṇena aññesu vacanesu attañ ca hoti. Guṇavantasmiṃ, guṇavantena.

Antaggahaṇena ntupaccayassa anto attam āpajjate, yonañ ca ikāro hoti. Guṇavanti.

And when ‘yo’ [and others] follow, the end of ‘ntu’.
When ‘su’, ‘naṃ’, ‘hi’ and ‘yo’ follow, the end vowel of the suffix ‘ntu’ becomes ‘a’.

  1. Guṇavantesu = guṇavantu + su (‘u’ of ‘ntu’ becomes ‘a’ (§92); ‘a’ becomes ‘e’ (§89)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘ntu’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘ntu’, such as in] isīnaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “when these follow”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘su’, ‘naṃ’, ‘hi’ and ‘yo’ do not follow, such as in] guṇavā.

By taking “ca”, when other inflections follow, there is also ‘a’. Examples: guṇavantasmiṃ, guṇavantena.

By taking “anta”, the end vowel of the suffix ‘ntu’ becomes ‘a’, and ‘yo’ becomes ‘i’. Example:

  1. Guṇavanti = guṇavantu + yo (‘u’ of ‘ntu’ becomes ‘a’ by “anta” (§92); ‘yo’ becomes ‘i’ (§92); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
93Kaccāyana Sutta. 106Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbassa vā aṃ-sesu (251)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbassa + vā + aṃ-sesu = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva ntupaccayassa attaṃ hoti vā aṃ sa icc etesu.

Satimaṃ bhikkhuṃ, satimantaṃ bhikkhuṃ vā. Bandhumaṃ rājānaṃ, bandhumantaṃ rājānaṃ vā (D. ii, 14)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 14. Satimassa bhikkhuno, satimato bhikkhuno vā. Bandhumassa rañño (D. ii, 6)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 6 suṅkaṃ. Bandhumato rañño (D. ii, 13)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 13 vā suṅkaṃ deti.

Etesv iti kimatthaṃ? Satimā bhikkhu. Bandhumā rājā.

Optionally, when ‘aṃ’ and ‘sa’ follow, [there is ‘a’] of the whole [‘ntu’].
Optionally, when ‘aṃ’ and ‘sa’ follow, there is ‘a’ of the whole suffix ‘ntu’.

  1. Satimaṃ = satimantu + aṃ (‘ntu’ becomes ‘a’ (§93); ‘a’ is elided (§83); ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘ṃ’ (§82)).
  2. Satimassa = satimantu + sa (‘ntu’ becomes ‘a’ (§93); ‘a’ is elided (§83); ‘s’ is inserted (§61)).

What is the purpose of saying “when these follow”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘aṃ’ and ‘sa’ do not follow, such as in] satimā bhikkhu, bandhumā rājā.

94Kaccāyana Sutta. 105Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Simhi vā (252)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Simhi + vā = 2 words]

Ntupaccayassa antassa attaṃ hoti vā simhi vibhattimhi.

Himavanto pabbato (Khu. i, 56)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 56.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Himavā pabbato.

Optionally, when the inflection ‘si’ follows.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘si’ follows, the end vowel of the suffix ‘ntu’ becomes ‘a’.

  1. Himavanto = himavantu + si (‘u’ of ‘ntu’ becomes ‘a’ (§94); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [This sutta does not always apply, such as in] himavā pabbato.

95Kaccāyana Sutta. 145Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Aggiss’ ini (254)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Aggissa + ini = 2 words]

Aggiss’ antassa ini hoti vā simhi vibhattimhi.

Purato aggini. Pacchato aggini. Akkhiṇato aggini. Vāmato aggini.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Aggi.

‘Ini’ of [the end vowel of] “aggi”.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘si’ follows, there is ‘ini’ of the end vowel of “aggi”.

  1. Aggini = aggi + si (‘i’ of “aggi” becomes ‘ini’ (§95); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [This sutta does not always apply, such as in] aggi.

96Kaccāyana Sutta. 148Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yosv akatarasso jho (259)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yosu + akatarasso + jho = 3 words]

Yosu akatarasso jho attam āpajjate.

Aggayo, munayo, isayo (Khu. ii, 88)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 88, gahapatayo (Khu. vi, 423)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 423.

Yosv iti kimatthaṃ? Aggīsu.

Akatarasso ti kimatthaṃ? Daṇḍino.

Jho ti kimatthaṃ? Rattiyo.

When ‘yo’ follows, ‘jha’ not shortened [becomes ‘a’].
When ‘yo’ follows, ‘jha’, which has not been shortened,24“Akatarasso”, lit., which has not been made short, means that it is naturally short. This sutta applies to the first plural inflection (‘yo’), to the vocative plural (‘yo’) and to the second plural inflection (‘yo’). becomes ‘a’.

  1. Aggayo = aggi + yo (‘i’ is named ‘jha’ (§58) and it has not been shortened; ‘i’ becomes ‘a’ (§96)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘yo’ [follows]”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘yo’ does not follow, such as in] aggīsu.

What is the purpose of saying “not shortened”? [This sutta does not apply when it has been shortened, such as in] daṇḍino.

Daṇḍino = daṇḍī + yo (‘ī’ of “daṇḍī” is shortened (§84); therefore this sutta does not operate).

What is the purpose of saying “‘jha’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘jha’, such as in] rattiyo.


24“Akatarasso”, lit., which has not been made short, means that it is naturally short. This sutta applies to the first plural inflection (‘yo’), to the vocative plural (‘yo’) and to the second plural inflection (‘yo’).
97Kaccāyana Sutta. 156Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ve-vosu lo ca (260)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ve-vosu + lo + ca = 3 words]

Ve-vo icc etesu akatarasso lo attam āpajjate.

Bhikkhave, bhikkhavo; hetave, hetavo.

Akatarasso ti kimatthaṃ? Sayambhuvo, vessabhuvo, parābhibhuvo.

Ve-vosv iti kimatthaṃ? Hetunā, ketunā, setunā.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And when ‘ve’ and ‘vo’ follow, ‘la’ [not shortened].
When ‘ve’ and ‘vo’ follow, ‘la’, which has not been shortened, becomes ‘a’.

  1. Bhikkhave = bhikkhu + yo (‘u’ of “bhikkhu” is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ve’ (§116); ‘u’, which has not been shortened, becomes ‘a’ (§97)).
  2. Bhikkhavo = bhikkhu + yo (‘u’ of “bhikkhu” is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘vo’ (§119); ‘u’, which has not been shortened, becomes ‘a’ (§97)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “not shortened”? [This sutta does not apply when it has been shortened, such as in] sayambhuvo, vessabhuvo, parābhibhuvo.

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘ve’ and ‘vo’ follow”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘ve’ and ‘vo’ do not follow, such as in] hetunā, ketunā, setunā.

“Ca” is for dragging (anukaḍḍhana).

98Kaccāyana Sutta. 189Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Mātulādīnam ānattam īkāre (261)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Mātulādīnaṃ + ānattaṃ + īkāre = 3 words]

Mātula icc evam ādīnaṃ anto ānattam āpajjate īkāre paccaye pare.

Mātulānī (Khu. i, 219)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 219, ayyakānī, varuṇānī.

Īkāre ti kimatthaṃ? Bhikkhunī, rājinī, jālinī, gahapatānī (Vin. i, 314)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. i, p. 314.

Ānattaggahaṇena nadī icc etassa dīsaddassa jjo-jjā-ādesā honti saha vibhattiyā yo nā sa icc etesu. Najjo sandanti (S. ii, 178)Saṃyutta-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 178; najjā kataṃ taraṅgaṃ; najjā nerañjarāya tīre (Vin. iii, 1)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 1.

When ‘ī’ follows, ‘āna’ of “mātula”, etc.
When the suffix ‘ī’ follows, the end vowel of “mātula”, etc., becomes ‘āna’.

  1. Mātulānī = mātula + ī (‘a’ of “mātula” becomes ‘āna’ (§98); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘ī’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘ī’ does not follow, such as in] bhikkhunī, rājinī, jālinī, gahapatānī.

By taking “ānatta”, when ‘yo’, ‘nā’ and ‘sa’ follow, ‘dī’ of “nadī” is substituted by ‘jjo’ and ‘jjā’ together with the inflections.

  1. Najjo = nadī + yo (‘dī’ together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘jjo’ (§98)).
99Kaccāyana Sutta. 81Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Smā-hi-smiṃnaṃ mhā-bhi-mhi vā (265-6)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Smā-hi-smiṃnaṃ + mhā-bhi-mhi + vā = 3 words]

Sabbato liṅgato smā hi smiṃ icc etesaṃ mhā bhi mhi icc ete ādesā honti vā yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Purisamhā, purisasmā; purisebhi, purisehi; purisamhi, purisasmiṃ.

Smā-hi-smiṃnam iti kimatthaṃ? Vaṇṇavantaṃ (Khu. i, 20)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 20 agandhakaṃ viruḷhapupphaṃ; mahantaṃ chattaṃ mahāchattaṃ; mahantaṃ dhajaṃ mahādhajaṃ.

Optionally, ‘mhā’, ‘bhi’ and ‘mhi’ of ‘smā’, ‘hi’ and ‘smiṃ’.
Optionally, after all the bases, ‘smā’, ‘hi’ and ‘smiṃ’ are substituted by ‘mhā’, ‘bhi’ and ‘mhi’ respectively.

  1. Purisamhā = purisa + smā (‘smā’ is substituted by ‘mhā’ (§99)).
  2. Purisebhi = purisa + hi (‘hi’ is substituted by ‘bhi’ (§99); ‘a’ of “purisa” becomes ‘e’ (§101)).
  3. Purisamhi = purisa + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘mhi’ (§99)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘smā’, ‘hi’ and ‘smiṃ’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘smā’, ‘hi’ or ‘smiṃ’, such as in] vaṇṇavantaṃ agandhakaṃ viruḷhapupphaṃ, mahantaṃ chattaṃ mahāchattaṃ, mahantaṃ dhajaṃ mahādhajaṃ.

100Kaccāyana Sutta. 214Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Na t’-imehi katākārehi (267)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Na + ta-imehi + kata-ākārehi = 3 words]

Ta ima icc etehi katākārehi smā-smiṃnaṃ mhā-mhi icc ete ādesā n’ eva honti.

Asmā ṭhāna bhayaṃ uppajjati; asmiṃ ṭhāne bhayaṃ tiṭṭhati; asmā; asmiṃ.

Katākārehī ti kimatthaṃ? Tamhā, tamhi, imamhā, imamhi.

When “ta” and “ima” become ‘a’, no [substitution].
When “ta” and “ima” become ‘a’, ‘smā’ and ‘smiṃ’ are not substituted by ‘mhā’ and ‘mhi’.

  1. Asmā = ta + smā (‘ta’ becomes ‘a’ (§176); ‘smā’ does not become ‘mhā’ (§100)).
  2. Asmiṃ = ta + smiṃ (‘ta’ becomes ‘a’ (§176); ‘smiṃ’ does not become ‘mhi’ (§100)).25Note: “asmā” and “asmiṃ” can also be formed from “ima”. In that case §177 · Imasaddassa ca — And of the [base] “ima”.">§177 applies.
  1. Asmā = ima + smā (“ima” becomes ‘a’ (§177); ‘smā’ does not become ‘mhā’ (§100)).
  2. Asmiṃ = ima + smiṃ (“ima” becomes ‘a’ (§177); ‘smiṃ’ does not become ‘mhi’ (§100)).

What is the purpose of saying “become ‘a’”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘ta’ and ‘ima’ do not become ‘a’, such as in] tamhā, tamhi, imamhā, imamhi.


25Note: “asmā” and “asmiṃ” can also be formed from “ima”. In that case §177 applies.
101Kaccāyana Sutta. 80Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Su-hisv akāro e (268)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Su-hisu + akāro + e = 3 words]

Su hi icc etesu akāro ettam āpajjate.

Sabbesu, yesu, tesu, kesu, purisesu, imesu, kusalesu, tumhesu, amhesu; sabbehi, yehi, tehi, kehi, purisehi, imehi, kusalehi, tumhehi, amhehi.

When ‘su’ and ‘hi’ follow, ‘a’ [becomes] ‘e’.
When ‘su’ and ‘hi’ follow, ‘a’ becomes ‘e’.

  1. Sabbesu = sabba + su (‘a’ becomes ‘e’ (§101)).
  2. Sabbehi = sabba + hi (‘a’ becomes ‘e’ (§101)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.
102Kaccāyana Sutta. 202Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbanāmānaṃ naṃmhi ca (270)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbanāmānaṃ + naṃmhi + ca = 3 words]

Sabbesaṃ sabbanāmānaṃ anto akāro ettam āpajjate naṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Sabbesaṃ, sabbesānaṃ; yesaṃ, yesānaṃ; tesaṃ, tesānaṃ; imesaṃ, imesānaṃ; kesaṃ, kesānaṃ; itaresaṃ, itaresānaṃ; katamesaṃ, katamesānaṃ.

Sabbanāmānam iti kimatthaṃ? Buddhānaṃ Bhagavantānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo (Vin. i, 114)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. i, p. 114.

Akāro ti kimatthaṃ? Amūsaṃ, amūsānaṃ.

Naṃmhi ti kimatthaṃ? Sabbe, ime.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And when ‘naṃ’ follows, of all the pronouns.
When the inflection ‘naṃ’ follows, the letter ‘a’, which is the end vowel of all the pronouns, becomes ‘e’.

  1. Sabbesaṃ = sabba + naṃ (‘a’ becomes ‘e’ (§102); ‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘saṃ’ (§168)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “of [all the] pronouns”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no pronouns, such as in] “Buddhānaṃ Bhagavantānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo”.

What is the purpose of saying “the letter ‘a’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘a’, such as in] amūsaṃ, amūsānaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘naṃ’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘naṃ’ does not follow, such as in] sabbe, ime.

Sabbe = sabba + yo (here ‘a’ does not become ‘e’; rather, ‘yo’ becomes ‘e’ by §164).

“Ca” is for dragging.26Here “ca” brings the procedure of changing ‘a’ into ‘e’ from the previous sutta.


26Here “ca” brings the procedure of changing ‘a’ into ‘e’ from the previous sutta.
103Kaccāyana Sutta. 79Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ato n’ ena (271)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ato + nā + ena = 3 words]

Tasmā akārato nāvacanassa enādeso hoti.

Sabbena, yena, tena, kena, anena, purisena, rūpena.

Ato ti kimatthaṃ? Muninā, amunā, bhikkhunā.

Nā ti kimatthaṃ? Tasmā.

After ‘a’, ‘ena’ [of] ‘nā’.
After the letter ‘a’, the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ena’.

  1. Sabbena = sabba + nā (‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ena’ (§103); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘a’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘a’, such as in] muninā, amunā, bhikkhunā.

What is the purpose of saying ‘nā’? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘nā’, such as in] tasmā.

104Kaccāyana Sutta. 66Rūpasiddhi Sutta.S’ o (272)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Si + o = 2 words]

Tasmā akārato sivacanassa okārādeso hoti.

Sabbo, yo, so, ko, amuko, puriso.

Sī ti kimatthaṃ? Purisānaṃ.

Ato ti kimatthaṃ? Sayambhū.

‘Si’ [becomes] ‘o’.
After the letter ‘a’, the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’.

  1. Sabbo = sabba + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying ‘si’? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘si’, such as in] purisānaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘a’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘a’, such as in] sayambhū.

105Kaccāyana Sutta. 0Rūpasiddhi Sutta.So vā (273)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[So + vā = 2 words]

Tasmā akārato nāvacanassa so-ādeso hoti vā.

Atthaso dhammaṃ jānāti. Byañjanaso atthaṃ jānāti. Akkharaso. Suttaso (A. ii, 207)Aṅguttara-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 207. Padaso (Vin. ii, 25)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 25. Yasaso. Upāyaso. Sabbaso (A. i, 556)Aṅguttara-nikāya · vol. i, p. 556. Thāmaso. Ṭhānaso.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Pādena vā pādārahena vā atirekapādena vā yo bhikkhu theyyacittena parassa bhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhāti, so bhikkhu pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso.

Optionally, ‘so’.
Optionally, after the letter ‘a’, the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘so’.

  1. Atthaso = attha + nā (‘nā’ is substituted by ‘so’ (§105)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [This sutta does not always apply, such as in] “Pādena vā pādārahena vā atirekapādena vā yo bhikkhu theyyacittena parassa bhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhāti, so bhikkhu pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso”. Translation: whatever bhikkhu, with the intention of stealing, takes the property of another –whether a quarter of a pāda [coin], or the equivalent of a quarter of a pāda, or more than a quarter of a pāda– that bhikkhu is one who has committed an offence entailing expulsion and can no longer live in communion.

106Kaccāyana Sutta. 313Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Dīgh’-orehi (274)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Dīgha-orehi = 1 word]

Dīgha ora icc etehi smāvacanassa so-ādeso hoti vā.

Dīghaso (Vin. i, 227)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. i, p. 227, oraso; dīghamhā, oramhā.

Dīgh’-orehi ti kimatthaṃ? Saramhā, vacanamhā.

After “dīgha” and “ora”.
Optionally, after “dīgha” and “ora”, the inflection ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘so’.

  1. Dīghaso = dīgha + smā (‘smā’ is substituted by ‘so’ (§106)).
  2. Oraso = ora + smā (‘smā’ is substituted by ‘so’ (§106)).

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘dīgha’ and ‘ora’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “dīgha” or “ora”, such as in] saramhā, vacanamhā.

107Kaccāyana Sutta. 69Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbayo-nīnam ā e (275, 277)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabba-yo-nīnaṃ + ā + e = 3 words]

Tasmā akārato sabbesaṃ yo-nīnaṃ ā-e-ādesā honti vā yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Purisā, purise; rūpā, rūpe.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Aggayo, munayo, isayo.

Yo-nīnan ti kimatthaṃ? Purisassa, rūpassa.

Akārato ti kimatthaṃ? Daṇḍino, aṭṭhīni, aggī, pajjalanti, munī caranti.

‘Ā’ and ‘e’ of the whole ‘yo’ and ‘ni’.
Optionally, after the letter ‘a’, the whole ‘yo’ and ‘ni’ are substituted by ‘ā’ and ‘e’ respectively.

  1. Purisā = purisa + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§107); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Purise = purisa + ni (‘ni’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§107); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [This sutta does not always apply, such as in] aggayo, munayo, isayo.

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘yo’ and ‘ni’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘yo’ or ‘ni’, such as in] purisassa, rūpassa.

What is the purpose of saying “after the letter ‘a’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘a’, such as in] daṇḍino, aṭṭhīni, aggī, pajjalanti, munī caranti.

108Kaccāyana Sutta. 90Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Smā-smiṃnaṃ vā (276)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Smā-smiṃnaṃ + vā = 2 words]

Tasmā akārato sabbesaṃ smā smiṃ icc etesaṃ ā-e-ādesā honti vā yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Purisā, purisasmā, purise, purisasmiṃ.

Akārato ti kimatthaṃ? Daṇḍinā, daṇḍismiṃ; bhikkhunā, bhikkhusmiṃ.

Optionally, [there are ‘ā’ and ‘e’] of ‘smā’ and ‘smiṃ’.
Optionally, after the letter ‘a’, ‘smā’ and ‘smiṃ’ are substituted by ‘ā’ and ‘e’ respectively.

  1. Purisā = purisa + smā (‘smā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§108); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Purise = purisa + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§108); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “after the letter ‘a’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘a’, such as in] daṇḍinā, daṇḍismiṃ; bhikkhunā, bhikkhusmiṃ.

109Kaccāyana Sutta. 304Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Āya catutthekavacanassa tu (279-80)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Āya + catuttha-ekavacanassa + tu = 3 words]

Tasmā akārato catutthekavacanassa āyādeso hoti vā.

Atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṃ Buddho loke uppajjati (A. i, 21)Aṅguttara-nikāya · vol. i, p. 21.

Ato ti kimatthaṃ? Isissa.

Catutthī ti kimatthaṃ? Purisassa mukhaṃ.

Ekavacanasse ti kimatthaṃ? Purisānaṃ dadāti.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā.

Tuggahaṇen’ atthañ ca hoti. Atthatthaṃ, hitatthaṃ, sukhatthaṃ.

‘Āya’ of the fourth singular.
Optionally, after the letter ‘a’, the fourth singular [inflection] is substituted by ‘āya’.

  1. Atthāya = attha + sa (‘sa’ is substituted by ‘āya’ (§109); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘a’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘a’, such as in] isissa.

What is the purpose of saying “the fourth [inflection]”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no fourth inflection, such as in] purisassa mukhaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “of the singular”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no singular, such as in] purisānaṃ dadāti.

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [This sutta does not always apply, such as in] “Dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā”.

By taking ‘tu’, there is also substitution by ‘atthaṃ’.

  1. Atthatthaṃ27For the benefit. = attha + sa (by ‘tu’ of this sutta, ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘atthaṃ’ (§109); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Hitatthaṃ28For the welfare. = hita + sa (by ‘tu’ of this sutta, ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘atthaṃ’ (§109); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Sukhatthaṃ29For the happiness. = sukha + sa (by ‘tu’ of this sutta, ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘atthaṃ’ (§109); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

27For the benefit.
28For the welfare.
29For the happiness.
110Kaccāyana Sutta. 201Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tayo n’ eva ca sabbanāmehi (281)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tayo + na + eva + ca + sabbanāmehi = 5 words]

Tehi sabbanāmehi akārantehi smā smiṃ sa icc etesaṃ30Smā smiṃ sa ekavacana icc’ etesaṃ (K). tayo ā-e-āyādesā n’ eva honti.

Sabbasmā, sabbasmiṃ, sabbassa. Yasmā, yasmiṃ, yassa. Tasmā, tasmiṃ, tassa. Kasmā, kasmiṃ, kassa. Imasmā, imasmiṃ, imassa.

Sabbanāmehi ti kimatthaṃ? Pāpā, pāpe, pāpāya.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And after the pronouns, the three are not [substituted].
After the pronouns ending in ‘a’, ‘smā’, ‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’ are not substituted by the following three: ‘ā’, ‘e’ and ‘āya’.

  1. Sabbasmā = sabba + smā (‘smā’ is not substituted by ‘ā’ (§110)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “after pronouns”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no pronouns, such as in] pāpā, pāpe, pāpāya.

“Ca” is for dragging.


30Smā smiṃ sa ekavacana icc’ etesaṃ (K).
111Kaccāyana Sutta. 179Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ghato nādīnaṃ (283)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ghato + nādīnaṃ = 2 words]

Tasmā ghato nādīnam ekavacanānaṃ vibhattigaṇānaṃ āyādeso hoti.

Kaññāya kataṃ kammaṃ, kaññāya dīyate, kaññāya nissaṭaṃ vatthaṃ. Kaññāya pariggaho, kaññāya patiṭṭhitaṃ sīlaṃ.

Ghato ti kimatthaṃ? Rattiyā, itthiyā, dhenuyā, vadhuyā.

Nādīnam iti kimatthaṃ? Kaññaṃ passati; vijjaṃ, vīṇaṃ, gaṅgaṃ.

Ekavacanānam iti kimatthaṃ? Sabbāsu, yāsu, tāsu, kāsu, imāsu, pabhāsu.

After ‘gha’, [there is ‘āya’] of ‘nā’ and others.
After ‘gha’, the group of singular inflections beginning with ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘āya’.

  1. Kaññāya = kaññā + nā (‘ā’ of “kaññā” is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘āya’ (§111); ‘ā’ is elided (§83)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘gha’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘gha’, such as in] rattiyā, itthiyā, dhenuyā, vadhuyā.

What is the purpose of saying “‘nā’, etc.”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘nā’, etc., such as in] kaññaṃ passati; vijjaṃ, vīṇaṃ, gaṅgaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “singular”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no singular, such as in] sabbāsu, yāsu, tāsu, kāsu, imāsu, pabhāsu.

112Kaccāyana Sutta. 183Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Pato yā (284)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Pato + yā = 2 words]

Tasmā pato nādīnam ekavacanānaṃ vibhattigaṇānaṃ yādeso hoti.

Rattiyā, itthiyā, deviyā, dhenuyā, yāguyā, vadhuyā.

Nādīnam iti kimatthaṃ? Rattī, rattiṃ; itthī, itthiṃ.

Pato ti kimatthaṃ? Kaññāya, vīṇāya, gaṅgāya, pabhāya, sobhāya.

Ekavacanānam iti kimatthaṃ? Rattīnaṃ, itthīnaṃ.

After ‘pa’, ‘yā’.
After ‘pa’, the group of singular inflections beginning with ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘yā’.

  1. Rattiyā = ratti + nā (‘i’ of “ratti” is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘yā’ (§112)).
  2. Dhenuyā = dhenu + nā (‘u’ of “dhenu” is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘yā’ (§112)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “of those beginning with ‘nā’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘nā’, etc., such as in] rattī, rattiṃ; itthī, itthiṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘pa’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘pa’, such as in] kaññāya, vīṇāya, gaṅgāya, pabhāya, sobhāya.

What is the purpose of saying “singular”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no singular, such as in] rattīnaṃ, itthīnaṃ.

113Kaccāyana Sutta. 132Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sakhato gass’ e vā (285-6)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sakhato + gassa + e + vā = 4 words]

Tasmā sakhato gassa akāra-ākāra-ikāra-īkāra-ekārādesā honti vā.

Bho sakha, bho sakhā, bho sakhi, bho sakhī, bho sakhe.

Optionally, ‘e’ of ‘ga’ after “sakha”.
Optionally, after “sakha”, there are the substitutions of ‘ga’ by ‘a’, ‘ā’, ‘i’, ‘ī’ and ‘e’.

  1. Sakha = sakha + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ga’ is substituted by ‘a’ (§113); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.
114Kaccāyana Sutta. 178Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ghat’ e ca (288)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ghato + e + ca = 3 words]

Tasmā ghato gassa ekārādeso hoti.

Bhoti ayye, bhoti kaññe, bhoti Kharādiye (Khu. v, 4)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 4.

Caggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ. Sanniṭṭhānaṃ.

And ‘e’ after ‘gha’.
After ‘gha’, ‘ga’ is substituted by ‘e’.

  1. Ayye = ayyā + si (‘ā’ is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ga’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§114); ‘ā’ is elided (§83)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

“Ca” is for delimiting (avadhāraṇa). [Here the meaning is] fixity (sanniṭṭhāna).

115Kaccāyana Sutta. 181Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Na ammādito (290)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Na + ammādito = 2 words]

Tato ammādito gassa ekārattaṃ na hoti.

Bhoti ammā, bhoti annā, bhoti ambā, bhoti tātā.

Ammādito ti kimatthaṃ? Bhoti kaññe.

After “ammā” and others, no [change].
After “ammā”, etc., ‘ga’ is not substituted by ‘e’.

  1. Ammā = ammā + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57) and is elided (§220); here ‘ga’ is not substituted by ‘e’ because there is “ammā” (§115)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘ammā’, etc.”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “ammā”, etc., such as in] bhoti kaññe.

116Kaccāyana Sutta. 197Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Akatarassā lato yv-ālapanassa ve-vo (291)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Akatarassa + lato + yo-ālapanassa + ve-vo = 4 words]

Tasmā akatarassā lato yvālapanassa ve-vo-ādesā honti.

Bhikkhave, bhikkhavo; hetave, hetavo.

Akatarassā ti kimatthaṃ? Sayambhuvo.

Lato ti kimatthaṃ? Nāgiyo, dhenuyo, yāguyo.

Ālapanasse ti kimatthaṃ? Te hetavo, te bhikkhavo.

After ‘la’ not shortened, ‘ve’ and ‘vo’ of the vocative ‘yo’.
After the letter ‘la’, which has not been shortened, the vocative ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ve’ and ‘vo’.

  1. Bhikkhave = bhikkhu + yo (‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ve’ (§116); ‘u’, which has not been shortened, becomes ‘a’ (§97)).
  2. Bhikkhavo = bhikkhu + yo (‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘vo’ (§116); ‘u’, which has not been shortened, becomes ‘a’ (§97)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “not shortened”? [This sutta does not apply when it has been shortened, such as in] sayambhuvo.

  1. Sayambhuvo = sayambhū + yo (‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘ū’ is shortened (§84); since ‘ū’ has been shortened, this sutta does not operate; ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘vo’ (§119)).

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘la’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘la’, such as in] nāgiyo, dhenuyo, yāguyo.

What is the purpose of saying “of the vocative”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no vocative, such as in] te hetavo, te bhikkhavo.

117Kaccāyana Sutta. 124Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Jha-lato sassa no vā (292)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Jha-lato + sassa + no + vā = 4 words]

Tasmā jha-lato sassa vibhattissa no-ādeso hoti vā.

Aggino, aggissa; sakhino, sakhissa; daṇḍino, daṇḍissa; bhikkhuno, bhikkhussa; sayambhuno, sayambhussa.

Sasse ti kimatthaṃ? Isinā, bhikkhunā.

Jha-lato ti kimatthaṃ? Purisassa.

Optionally, after ‘jha’ and ‘la’, ‘no’ [of] ‘sa’.
Optionally, after ‘jha’ and ‘la’, the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’.

  1. Aggino = aggi + sa (‘i’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§117)).
  2. Bhikkhuno = bhikkhu + sa (‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§117)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘sa’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘sa’, such as in] isinā, bhikkhunā.

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘jha’ and ‘la’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘jha’ or ‘la’, such as in] purisassa.

118Kaccāyana Sutta. 146Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Gha-pato ca yonaṃ lopo (293)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Gha-pato + ca + yonaṃ + lopo = 4 words]

Tehi gha pa jha la icc etehi yonaṃ lopo hoti vā.

Kaññā, kaññāyo; rattī, rattiyo; itthī, itthiyo; yāgū, yāguyo; vadhū, vadhuyo. Aggī, aggayo; bhikkhū, bhikkhavo; sayambhū, sayambhuvo; aṭṭhī, aṭṭhīni; āyū, āyūni.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And after ‘gha’ and ‘pa’, [there is] elision of ‘yo’.
Optionally, after ‘gha’, ‘pa’, ‘jha’ and ‘la’, there is elision of ‘yo’.

  1. Kaññā = kaññā + yo (‘ā’ is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘yo’ is elided (§118)).
  2. Rattī = ratti + yo (‘i’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘yo’ is elided (§118); ‘i’ is lengthened (§88)).
  3. Itthī = itthī + yo (‘ī’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘yo’ is elided (§118)).
  4. Yāgū = yāgu + yo (‘u’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘yo’ is elided (§118); ‘u’ is lengthened (§88)).
  5. Vadhū = vadhū + yo (‘ū’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘yo’ is elided (§118)).

“Ca” is for dragging.

119Kaccāyana Sutta. 155Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Lato vokāro ca (294)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Lato + vo-kāro + ca = 3 words]

Tasmā lato yonaṃ vokāro hoti vā.

Bhikkhavo, bhikkhū; sayambhuvo, sayambhū.

Kāraggahaṇaṃ kimatthaṃ? Yonaṃ no ca hoti. Jantuno.

Caggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ. Amū purisā tiṭṭhanti. Amū purise passatha.

And after ‘la’, the letter ‘vo’.
Optionally, after ‘la’, ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘vo’.

  1. Bhikkhavo = bhikkhu + yo (‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘u’ becomes ‘a’ (§97); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘vo’ (§119)).

What is the purpose of taking “kāra” [in the sutta]? ‘Yo’ is also substituted by ‘no’.

  1. Jantuno = jantu + sa (‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§117)).

“Ca” is for preventing the operation in the following cases: Amū purisā tiṭṭhanti. Amū purise passatha.

  1. Amū = amu + yo (‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); by “ca”, ‘yo’ is not substituted by ‘no’ (§119); ‘yo’ is elided (§118); ‘u’ is lengthened (§88)).
Iti nāma-kappe paṭhamo kaṇḍo
Thus ends the first section of the noun chapter
Dutiya-Kaṇḍa· Second section
120Kaccāyana Sutta. 243Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Amhassa mamaṃ savibhattissa se (295)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Amhassa + mamaṃ + sa-vibhattissa + se = 4 words]

Sabbass’ eva amhasaddassa savibhattissa mamaṃ-ādeso hoti se vibhattimhi.

Mamaṃ dīyate purisena. Mamaṃ pariggaho.

When the inflection ‘sa’ follows, “mamaṃ” [of] “amha”.
When the inflection ‘sa’ follows, the whole word “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “mamaṃ”.

  1. Mamaṃ = amha + sa (“amha” together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by “mamaṃ” (§120)).
121Kaccāyana Sutta. 233Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Mayaṃ yomhi paṭhame (296)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Mayaṃ + yomhi + paṭhame = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva amhasaddassa savibhattissa mayaṃ-ādeso hoti yomhi paṭhame.

Mayaṃ gacchāma. Mayaṃ dema.

Amhasse ti kimatthaṃ? Purisā tiṭṭhanti.

Yomhi kimatthaṃ? Ahaṃ gacchāmi.

Paṭhame ti kimatthaṃ? Amhākaṃ passasi tvaṃ.

When the first ‘yo’ follows, “mayaṃ”.
When the first [inflection] ‘yo’ follows, the whole word “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “mayaṃ”.

  1. Mayaṃ = amha + yo (“amha” together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “mayaṃ” (§121)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘amha’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘amha’, such as in] purisā tiṭṭhanti.

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘yo’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘yo’ does not follow, such as in] ahaṃ gacchāmi.

What is the purpose of saying “the first [inflection]”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘yo’ is not the first inflection, such as in] amhākaṃ passasi tvaṃ.

122Kaccāyana Sutta. 99Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ntussa nto (297)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ntussa + nto = 2 words]

Sabbass’ eva ntupaccayassa savibhattissa nto-ādeso hoti yomhi paṭhame.

Guṇavanto tiṭṭhanti.

Ntusse ti kimatthaṃ? Sabbe sattā gacchanti.

Paṭhame ti kimatthaṃ? Guṇavante passanti janā.

‘Nto’ of ‘ntu’.
When the first [inflection] ‘yo’ follows, the whole suffix ‘ntu’ together with the inflection is substituted by ‘nto’.

  1. Guṇavanto = guṇavantu + yo (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘nto’ (§122)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘ntu’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘ntu’, such as in] sabbe sattā gacchanti.

What is the purpose of saying “the first [inflection]”? [This sutta does not apply when it is not the first inflection, such as in] guṇavante passanti janā.

123Kaccāyana Sutta. 103Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ntassa se vā (298)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ntassa + se + vā = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva ntupaccayassa savibhattissa ntassādeso hoti vā se vibhattimhi.

Sīlavantassa jhāyino (Khu. i, 29)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 29, sīlavato jhāyino vā.

Se ti kimatthaṃ? Sīlavā tiṭṭhati.

Optionally, when ‘sa’ follows, ‘ntassa’.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘sa’ follows, the whole suffix ‘ntu’ together with the inflection is substituted by ‘ntassa’.

  1. Sīlavantassa = sīlavantu + sa (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘ntassa’ (§123)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘sa’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘sa’ does not follow, such as in] sīlavā tiṭṭhati.

124Kaccāyana Sutta. 98Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ā simhi (299)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ā + simhi = 2 words]

Sabbass’ eva ntupaccayassa savibhattissa ā-ādeso hoti simhi vibhattimhi.

Guṇavā, paññavā, sīlavā, balavā, dhanavā, mahimā, satimā (M. i, 70)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. i, p. 70, dhitimā (S. i, 170)Saṃyutta-nikāya · vol. i, p. 170.

Ntusse ti kimatthaṃ? Puriso tiṭṭhati.

Simhī ti kimatthaṃ? Sīlavanto tiṭṭhanti.

When ‘si’ follows, ‘ā’.
When the inflection ‘si’ follows, the whole suffix ‘ntu’ together with the inflection is substituted by ‘ā’.

  1. Guṇavā = guṇavantu + si (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§124); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Satimā = satimantu + si (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§124); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘ntu’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘ntu’, such as in] puriso tiṭṭhati.

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘si’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘si’ does not follow, such as in] sīlavanto tiṭṭhanti.

125Kaccāyana Sutta. 198Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Aṃ napuṃsake (300-1)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Aṃ + napuṃsake = 2 words]

Sabbass’ eva ntupaccayassa savibhattissa aṃ-ādeso hoti simhi vibhattimhi napuṃsake vattamānassa.

Guṇavaṃ cittaṃ tiṭṭhati; rucimaṃ pupphaṃ virocati.

Simhi ti kimatthaṃ? Vaṇṇavantaṃ agandhakaṃ virūḷhapupphaṃ passasi tvaṃ.

In the neuter, ‘aṃ’.
When the inflection ‘si’ follows and the gender is neuter, the whole suffix ‘ntu’ together with the inflection is substituted by ‘aṃ’.

  1. Guṇavaṃ = guṇavantu + si (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§125); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘si’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘si’ does not follow, such as in] vaṇṇavantaṃ agandhakaṃ virūḷhapupphaṃ passasi tvaṃ.

126Kaccāyana Sutta. 101Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Avaṇṇā ca ge (301-2)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Avaṇṇā + ca + ge = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva ntupaccayassa savibhattissa aṃ-avaṇṇā ca honti ge pare.

Bho guṇavaṃ, bho guṇava, bho guṇavā.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And when ‘ga’ follows, [there is ‘aṃ’], ‘a’ and ‘ā’.
When ‘ga’ follows, the whole suffix ‘ntu’ together with the inflection is substituted by ‘aṃ’, ‘a’ and ‘ā’.

  1. Guṇavaṃ = guṇavantu + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§126); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Guṇava = guṇavantu + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘a’ (§126); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Guṇavā = guṇavantu + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§126); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

“Ca” is for dragging.

127Kaccāyana Sutta. 102Rūpasiddhi Sutta.To-ti-tā sa-smiṃ-nāsu (303)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[To-ti-tā + sa-smiṃ-nāsu = 2 words]

Sabbass’ eva ntupaccayassa savibhattissa to-ti-tādesā honti vā sa smiṃ nā icc etesu yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Guṇavato, guṇavantassa; guṇavati, guṇavantasmiṃ; guṇavatā, guṇavantena; satimato, satimantassa; satimati, satimantasmiṃ; satimatā, satimantena.

Etesv iti kimatthaṃ? Guṇavā. Satimā (M. i, 70)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. i, p. 70.

When ‘sa’, ‘smiṃ’ and ‘nā’ follow, [there are] ‘to’, ‘ti’ and ‘tā’.
Optionally, when ‘sa’, ‘smiṃ’ and ‘nā’ follow, the whole suffix ‘ntu’ together with the inflection is substituted by ‘to’, ‘ti’ and ‘tā’ respectively.

  1. Guṇavato = guṇavantu + sa (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘to’ (§127)).
  2. Guṇavati = guṇavantu + smiṃ (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ti’ (§127)).
  3. Guṇavatā = guṇavantu + nā (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘tā’ (§127)).
  4. Satimato = satimantu + sa (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘to’ (§127)).
  5. Satimati = satimantu + smiṃ (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ti’ (§127)).
  6. Satimatā = satimantu + nā (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘tā’ (§127)).

What is the purpose of saying “when these follow”? [This sutta does not apply when these do not follow, such as in] guṇavā, satimā.

128Kaccāyana Sutta. 104Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Naṃmhi taṃ vā (304)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Naṃmhi + taṃ + vā = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva ntupaccayassa savibhattissa taṃ-ādeso hoti vā naṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Guṇavataṃ, guṇavantānaṃ; satimataṃ, satimantānaṃ.

Naṃmhi ti kimatthaṃ? Guṇavanto tiṭṭhanti. Satimanto tiṭṭhanti.

Optionally, when ‘naṃ’ follows, ‘taṃ’.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘naṃ’ follows, the whole suffix ‘ntu’ together with the inflection is substituted by ‘taṃ’.

  1. Guṇavataṃ = guṇavantu + naṃ (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘taṃ’ (§128)).
  2. Satimataṃ = satimantu + naṃ (‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘taṃ’ (§128)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘naṃ’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘naṃ’ does not follow, such as in] guṇavanto tiṭṭhanti, satimanto tiṭṭhanti.

129Kaccāyana Sutta. 222Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Imass’ idaṃ aṃ-sisu napuṃsake (305)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Imassa + idaṃ + aṃ-sisu + napuṃsake = 4 words]

Sabbass’ eva imasaddassa savibhattissa idaṃ-ādeso hoti vā aṃ-sisu napuṃsake vattamānassa.

Idaṃ cittaṃ passasi; idaṃ cittaṃ tiṭṭhati; imaṃ cittaṃ passasi; imaṃ cittaṃ tiṭṭhati.

Napuṃsake ti kimatthaṃ? Imaṃ purisaṃ passasi. Ayaṃ puriso tiṭṭhati.

In the neuter, when ‘aṃ’ and ‘si’ follow, “idaṃ” [of] “ima”.
Optionally, in the neuter gender, when ‘aṃ’ and ‘si’ follow, the whole word “ima” together with the inflection is substituted by “idaṃ”.

  1. Idaṃ = ima + aṃ (“ima” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is substituted by “idaṃ” (§129)).

What is the purpose of saying “in the neuter”? [This sutta does not apply when it is not neuter, such as in] imaṃ purisaṃ passasi; ayaṃ puriso tiṭṭhati.

130Kaccāyana Sutta. 225Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Amuss’ āduṃ (308)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Amussa + āduṃ = 2 words]

Sabbass’ eva amusaddassa savibhattissa aduṃ-ādeso hoti aṃ-sisu napuṃsake vattamānassa.

Aduṃ (Khu. v, 34)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 34 pupphaṃ passasi; aduṃ (Khu. v, 34)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 34 pupphaṃ virocati.

Napuṃsake ti kimatthaṃ? Amuṃ (M. i, 210)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. i, p. 210 rājānaṃ passasi; asu (D. ii, 162)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 162 rājā tiṭṭhati.

“Aduṃ” [of] “amu”.
In the neuter gender, when ‘aṃ’ and ‘si’ follow, the whole word “amu” together with the inflection is substituted by “aduṃ”.

  1. Aduṃ = amu + aṃ (“amu” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is substituted by “aduṃ” (§130)).

What is the purpose of saying “in the neuter”? [This sutta does not apply when it is not neuter, such as in] amuṃ rājānaṃ passasi; asu rājā tiṭṭhati.

131Kaccāyana Sutta. 0Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Itthi-puma-napuṃsaka-saṅkhyaṃ (309)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Itthi-puma-napuṃsaka-saṅkhyaṃ = 1 word]

“Itthi-puma-napuṃsaka-saṅkhyaṃ” icc etaṃ adhikāratthaṃ veditabbaṃ.

A numeral that is feminine, masculine and neuter.
“A numeral that is feminine, masculine and neuter”, this should be understood as a governing aphorism (adhikāra-sutta).31This sutta is dragged and has influence over the three following suttas: §132 · Yosu dvinnaṃ dve ca — And when ‘yo’ follow, “dve” [of] “dvi”.">§132-§133 · Ti-catunnaṃ tisso catasso tayo cattāro tīṇi cattāri — “Tisso”, “catasso”, “tayo”, “cattāro”, “tīṇi”, “cattāri” [of] “ti” and “catu”.">§133-§134 · Pañcādīnam akāro — The letter ‘a’ of “pañca”, etc.">§134.

31This sutta is dragged and has influence over the three following suttas: §132-§133-§134.
132Kaccāyana Sutta. 228Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yosu dvinnaṃ dve ca (310)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yosu + dvinnaṃ + dve + ca = 4 words]

Dvinnaṃ saṅkhyānaṃ itthi-puma-napuṃsake vattamānānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ dve hoti yo icc etesu.

Dve itthiyo, dve dhammā, dve rūpāni.

Yosv iti kimatthaṃ? Dvīsu.

Caggahaṇena duve dvaya ubha ubhaya duvi ca honti yo nā aṃ naṃ icc etesu. Duve (DA. i, 58)Dīgha-nikāya-aṭṭhakathā · vol. i, p. 58 samaṇā. Duve (DA. i, 58)Dīgha-nikāya-aṭṭhakathā · vol. i, p. 58 brāhmaṇā. Duve (DA. i, 58)Dīgha-nikāya-aṭṭhakathā · vol. i, p. 58 janā. Dvayena, dvayaṃ (Vin. i, 24; VinA. i, 105)Vinaya-piṭaka · Vinaya-aṭṭhakathā. Ubhinnaṃ (Khu. v, 18)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 18. Ubhayesaṃ, duvinnaṃ.

And when ‘yo’ follow, “dve” [of] “dvi”.
When ‘yo’ follow, the numeral “dvi”, which is feminine, masculine and neuter, together with the inflection is substituted by “dve”.

  1. Dve = dvi + yo (“dvi” together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “dve” (§132)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘yo’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘yo’ does not follow, such as in] dvīsu.

By taking “ca”, when ‘yo’, ‘nā’, ‘aṃ’ and ‘naṃ’ follow, there are also the substitutions by “duve”, “dvaya”, “ubha”, “ubhaya” and “duvi”.

  1. Duve samaṇā, duve brāhmaṇā, duve janā.
  2. Dvayena, dvayaṃ.
  3. Ubhinnaṃ.
  4. Ubhayesaṃ, duvinnaṃ.
133Kaccāyana Sutta. 230Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ti-catunnaṃ tisso catasso tayo cattāro tīṇi cattāri (311)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ti-catunnaṃ + tisso-catasso-tayo-cattāro-tīṇi-cattāri = 2 words]

Ti-catunnaṃ saṅkhyānaṃ itthi-puma-napuṃsake vattamānānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tisso catasso tayo cattāro tīṇi cattāri icc ete ādesā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ yo icc etesu.

Tisso vedanā (D. iii, 181)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. iii, p. 181; catasso disā; tayo janā (Khu. v, 196)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 196; cattāro purisā; tīṇi āyatanāni; cattāri ariyasaccāni (Khu. i, 3)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 3.

Yosv iti kimatthaṃ? Tīsu, catūsu.

“Tisso”, “catasso”, “tayo”, “cattāro”, “tīṇi”, “cattāri” [of] “ti” and “catu”.
When ‘yo’ follows, the numerals “ti” and “catu”, which are feminine, masculine and neuter, together with the inflections are substituted by “tisso”, “catasso”, “tayo”, “cattāro”, “tīṇi” and “cattāri” respectively.

  1. Tisso = ti + yo (“ti”, which is feminine, together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “tisso” (§133)).
  2. Catasso = catu + yo (“catu”, which is feminine, together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “catasso” (§133)).
  3. Tayo = ti + yo (“ti”, which is masculine, together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “tayo” (§133)).
  4. Cattāro = catu + yo (“catu”, which is masculine, together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “cattāro” (§133)).
  5. Tīṇi = ti + yo (“ti”, which is neuter, together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “tīṇi” (§133)).
  6. Cattāri = catu + yo (“catu”, which is neuter, together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “cattāri” (§133)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘yo’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘yo’ does not follow, such as in] tīsu, catūsu.

134Kaccāyana Sutta. 251Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Pañcādīnam akāro (247)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Pañca-ādīnaṃ + akāro = 2 words]

Pañcādīnaṃ saṅkhyānaṃ itthi-puma-napuṃsake vattamānānaṃ savibhattissa antassa sarassa akāro hoti yo icc etesu.

Pañca, pañca; cha, cha; satta, satta; aṭṭha, aṭṭha; nava, nava; dasa, dasa.

Pañcādīnam iti kimatthaṃ? Dve, tayo.

The letter ‘a’ of “pañca”, etc.
When ‘yo’ follows, the end vowel together with the inflection, of the numerals “pañca”, etc., which are feminine, masculine and neuter, is substituted by the letter ‘a’.32This sutta serves to prevent the operation of §107 · Sabbayo-nīnam ā e — ‘Ā’ and ‘e’ of the whole ‘yo’ and ‘ni’.">§107.

  1. Pañca = pañca + yo (‘a’ of “pañca” together with the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘a’ (§134)).
  2. The formation of the rest of the examples is similar to the previous one.

What is the purpose of saying “of the numerals ‘pañca’, etc.”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “pañca”, etc., such as in] dve, tayo.


32This sutta serves to prevent the operation of §107.
135Kaccāyana Sutta. 118Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Rājassa rañño rājino se (314)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Rājassa + rañño-rājino + se = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva rājasaddassa savibhattissa rañño rājino (Khu. i, 324)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 324 icc ete ādesā honti se vibhattimhi.

Rañño, rājino.

Se ti kimatthaṃ? Raññā.

When the inflection ‘sa’ follows, “rañño” and “rājino” [of] “rāja”.
When the inflection ‘sa’ follows, the whole word “rāja” together with the inflection is substituted by “rañño” and “rājino”.

  1. Rañño = rāja + sa (“rāja” together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by “rañño” (§135)).
  2. Rājino = rāja + sa (“rāja” together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by “rājino” (§135)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the inflection ‘sa’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘sa’ does not follow, such as in] raññā.

136Kaccāyana Sutta. 119Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Raññaṃ naṃmhi vā (315)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Raññaṃ + naṃmhi + vā = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva rājasaddassa savibhattissa raññaṃ-ādeso hoti vā naṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Raññaṃ, rājūnaṃ (Khu. i, 88)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 88 idaṃ raṭṭhaṃ.

Optionally, when ‘naṃ’ follows, “raññaṃ”.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘naṃ’ follows, the whole word “rāja” together with the inflection is substituted by “raññaṃ”.

  1. Raññaṃ = rāja + naṃ (“rāja” together with the inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by “raññaṃ” (§136)).
137Kaccāyana Sutta. 116Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Nāmhi raññā vā (316)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Nāmhi + raññā + vā = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva rājasaddassa savibhattissa raññā-ādeso hoti vā nāmhi vibhattimhi.

Tena raññā kataṃ, rājena vā kataṃ.

Nāmhi ti kimatthaṃ? Rañño santakaṃ.

Optionally, when ‘nā’ follows, “raññā”.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘nā’ follows, the whole word “rāja” together with the inflection is substituted by “raññā”.

  1. Raññā = rāja + nā (“rāja” together with the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by “raññā” (§137)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the inflection ‘nā’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘nā’ does not follow, such as in] rañño santakaṃ.

138Kaccāyana Sutta. 121Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Smiṃmhi raññe rājini (317)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Smiṃmhi + raññe-rājini = 2 words]

Sabbass’ eva rājasaddassa savibhattissa raññe-rājini icc ete ādesā honti smiṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Raññe, rājini sīlaṃ tiṭṭhati.

When ‘smiṃ’ follows, “raññe” and “rājini”.
When the inflection ‘smiṃ’ follows, the whole word “rāja” together with the inflection is substituted by “raññe” and “rājini”.

  1. Raññe = rāja + smiṃ (“rāja” together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by “raññe” (§138)).
  2. Rājini = rāja + smiṃ (“rāja” together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by “rājini” (§138)).
139Kaccāyana Sutta. 245Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tumh’-āmhākaṃ tayi mayi (318)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tumha-amhākaṃ + tayi-mayi = 2 words]

Sabbessaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tayi mayi icc ete ādesā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ smiṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Tayi, mayi.

Smiṃmhī ti kimatthaṃ? Tvaṃ bhavasi. Ahaṃ bhavāmi.

“Tayi” and “mayi” [of] “tumha” and “amha”.
When the inflection ‘smiṃ’ follows, the whole word “tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tayi”, and the whole word “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “mayi”.

  1. Tayi = tumha + smiṃ (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by “tayi” (§139)).
  2. Mayi = amha + smiṃ (“amha” together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by “mayi” (§139)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the inflection ‘smiṃ’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘smiṃ’ does not follow, such as in] tvaṃ bhavasi, ahaṃ bhavāmi.

140Kaccāyana Sutta. 232Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tvam-ahaṃ simhi ca (319-20)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tvaṃ-ahaṃ + simhi + ca = 3 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tvaṃ-ahaṃ icc ete ādesā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ simhi vibhattimhi.

Tvaṃ, ahaṃ.

Simhi ti kimatthaṃ? Tayi, mayi.

Caggahaṇena tuvaṃ ca hoti. Tuvaṃ satthā (M. ii, 354)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 354.

And when ‘si’ follows, “tvaṃ” and “ahaṃ”.
When the inflection ‘si’ follows, the whole word “tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tvaṃ”, and the whole word “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “ahaṃ”.

  1. Tvaṃ = tumha + si (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by “tvaṃ” (§140)).
  2. Ahaṃ = amha + si (“amha” together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by “ahaṃ” (§140)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the inflection ‘si’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘si’ does not follow, such as in] tayi, mayi.

By taking “ca”, there is also the substitution by “tuvaṃ”.

  1. Tuvaṃ = tumha + si (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by “tuvaṃ” (§140)).
141Kaccāyana Sutta. 241Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tava-mama se
[Tava-mama + se = 2 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tava mama icc ete ādesā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ se vibhattimhi.

Tava, mama.

Se ti kimatthaṃ? Tayi, mayi.

When ‘sa’ follows, “tava” and “mama”.
When the inflection ‘sa’ follows, the whole word “tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tava”, and the whole word “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “mama”.

  1. Tava = tumha + sa (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by “tava” (§141)).
  2. Mama = amha + sa (“amha” together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by “mama” (§141)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the inflection ‘sa’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘sa’ does not follow, such as in] tayi, mayi.

142Kaccāyana Sutta. 242Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tuyhaṃ mayhañ ca (321)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tuyhaṃ-mayhaṃ + ca = 2 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tuyhaṃ mayhaṃ icc ete ādesā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ se vibhattimhi.

Tuyhaṃ, mayhaṃ dhanaṃ dīyate.

Se ti kimatthaṃ? Tayā, mayā.

And “tuyhaṃ” and “mayhaṃ”.
When the inflection ‘sa’ follows, the whole word “tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tuyhaṃ”, and the whole word “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “mayhaṃ”.

  1. Tuyhaṃ = tumha + sa (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by “tuyhaṃ” (§142)).
  2. Mayhaṃ = amha + sa (“amha” together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by “mayhaṃ” (§142)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the inflection ‘sa’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘sa’ does not follow, such as in] tayā, mayā.

143Kaccāyana Sutta. 235Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Taṃ-mam aṃmhi (322)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Taṃ-maṃ + aṃmhi = 2 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ taṃ maṃ icc ete ādesā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ aṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Taṃ, maṃ.

Aṃmhi ti kimatthaṃ? Tayā, mayā.

When ‘aṃ’ follows, “taṃ” and “maṃ”.
When the inflection ‘aṃ’ follows, the whole word “tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “taṃ”, and the whole word “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “maṃ”.

  1. Taṃ = tumha + aṃ (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is substituted by “taṃ” (§143)).
  2. Maṃ = amha + aṃ (“amha” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is substituted by “maṃ” (§143)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the inflection ‘aṃ’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘aṃ’ does not follow, such as in] tayā, mayā.

144Kaccāyana Sutta. 234Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tavaṃ mamañ ca navā (322)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tavaṃ-mamaṃ + ca + navā = 3 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tavaṃ-mamaṃ icc ete ādesā honti navā yathāsaṅkhyaṃ aṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Tavaṃ, mamaṃ passati.

Navā ti kimatthaṃ? Taṃ, maṃ passati.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And occasionally “tavaṃ” and “mamaṃ”.
Occasionally, when the inflection ‘aṃ’ follows, the whole word “tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tavaṃ”, and the whole word “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “mamaṃ”.

  1. Tavaṃ = tumha + aṃ (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is substituted by “tavaṃ” (§144)).
  2. Mamaṃ = amha + aṃ (“amha” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is substituted by “mamaṃ” (§144)).

What is the purpose of saying “occasionally”? [To exclude the cases in which this rule does not apply, such as in] taṃ, maṃ passati.

“Ca” is for dragging.33To bring the word “aṃmhi” from the previous sutta.


33To bring the word “aṃmhi” from the previous sutta.
145Kaccāyana Sutta. 238Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Nāmhi tayā mayā (323)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Nāmhi + tayā-mayā = 2 words]

Sabbessaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ tayā mayā icc ete ādesā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ nāmhi vibhattimhi.

Tayā, mayā kataṃ.

Nāmhī ti kimatthaṃ? Tumhehi, amhehi.

When ‘nā’ follows, “tayā” and “mayā”.
When the inflection ‘nā’ follows, the whole word “tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tayā”, and the whole word “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “mayā”.

  1. Tayā = tumha + nā (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by “tayā” (§145)).
  2. Mayā = amha + nā (“amha” together with the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by “mayā” (§145)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the inflection ‘nā’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘nā’ does not follow, such as in] tumhehi, amhehi.

146Kaccāyana Sutta. 236Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tumhassa tuvaṃ-tvaṃ aṃmhi (324)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tumhassa + tuvaṃ-tvaṃ + aṃmhi = 3 words]

Sabbassa tumhasaddassa savibhattissa tuvaṃ tvaṃ icc ete ādesā honti aṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Kaliṅgarassa tuvaṃ maññe, kaṭṭhassa tvaṃ maññe.

When ‘aṃ’ follows, “tuvaṃ” and “tvaṃ” [of] “tumha”.
When the inflection ‘aṃ’ follows, the whole word “tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tuvaṃ” and “tvaṃ”.

  1. Tuvaṃ = tumha + aṃ (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is substituted by “tuvaṃ” (§146)).
  2. Tvaṃ = tumha + aṃ (“tumha” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is substituted by “tvaṃ” (§146)).
147Kaccāyana Sutta. 246Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Padato dutiyā-catutthī-chaṭṭhīsu vo-no (325)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Padato + dutiyā-catutthī-chaṭṭhīsu + vo-no = 3 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ yadā padasmā paresaṃ vo-no-ādesā honti navā yathāsaṅkhyaṃ dutiyā catutthī chaṭṭhī icc etesu bahuvacanesu.

Pahāya vo bhikkhave gamissāmi (Khu. iv, 265)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. iv, p. 265; mā no ajja vikantiṃsu (Khu. vi, 93)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 93 rañño sūdā mahānase. Evaṃ dutiyatthe.

Dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmi (M. iii, 86)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. iii, p. 86; saṃvibhajetha no rajjena (D. ii, 188)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 188. Evaṃ catutthyatthe.

Tuṭṭho ’smi vo bhikkhave pakatiyā (Khu. vi, 89)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 89; satthā no Bhagavā anuppatto (M. i, 266)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. i, p. 266. Evaṃ chaṭṭhyatthe.

Navā ti kimatthaṃ? Eso amhākaṃ satthā.

Tumha-amhākaṃ iti kimatthaṃ? Ete isayo passasi.

Padato ti kimatthaṃ? Tumhākaṃ satthā.

Etesv iti kimatthaṃ? Gacchatha tumhe.

After a word, when the second, fourth and sixth [inflections] follow, “vo” and “no”.
Occasionally, when the second, fourth and sixth inflections in the plural follow, the whole words “tumha” and “amha”, when they come after a word, together with the inflections, are substituted by “vo” and “no” respectively.34“Vo” and “no” cannot come at the beginning of a sentence.

  1. Vo = tumha + yo (“tumha” together with the second plural inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “vo” (§147)).
  2. No = amha + yo (“amha” together with the second plural inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by “no” (§147)).

“Pahāya vo bhikkhave gamissāmi” (having left you, O bhikkhus, I will go).

“Mā no ajja vikantiṃsu rañño sūdā mahānase” (may the king's cooks not cut us up today in the royal kitchen).

  1. Vo = tumha + naṃ (“tumha” together with the fourth plural inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by “vo” (§147)).
  2. No = amha + naṃ (“amha” together with the fourth plural inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by “no” (§147)).

“Dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmi” (O bhikkhus, I will teach you the Dhamma).

“Saṃvibhajetha no rajjena” (share the kingdom with us).

  1. Vo = tumha + naṃ (“tumha” together with the sixth plural inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by “vo” (§147)).
  2. No = amha + naṃ (“amha” together with the sixth plural inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by “no” (§147)).

“Tuṭṭho ’smi vo bhikkhave pakatiyā” (O bhikkhus, I am satisfied with your nature).

“Satthā no Bhagavā anuppatto” (the Blessed One, our Teacher, has arrived).

What is the purpose of saying “occasionally”? [This sutta does not always apply, such as in] eso amhākaṃ satthā.

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘tumha’ and ‘amha’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “tumha” or “amha”, such as in] ete isayo passasi.

What is the purpose of saying “after a word”? [This sutta does not apply when they do not come after a word, such as in] tumhākaṃ satthā.

What is the purpose of saying “when the second, fourth and sixth [inflections] follow”? [This sutta does not apply when these inflections do not follow, such as in] gacchatha tumhe.


34“Vo” and “no” cannot come at the beginning of a sentence.
148Kaccāyana Sutta. 247Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Te-me ’kavacanesu ca (326)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Te-me + ekavacanesu + ca = 3 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ yadā padasmā paresaṃ te me-ādesā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ catutthī chaṭṭhī icc etesu ekavacanesu.

Dadāmi te gāmavarāni pañca (Khu. v, 229)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 229; dadāhi me gāmavaraṃ; idaṃ te raṭṭhaṃ (Khu. vi, 66, 131)Khuddaka-nikāya; ayaṃ me putto.

Padato ti kimatthaṃ? Tava ñāti, mama ñāti.

And when [those inflections] follow in the singular, “te” and “me”.
When the fourth and sixth inflections in the singular follow, the whole words “tumha” and “amha”, when they come after a word, together with the inflections, are substituted by “te” and “me” respectively.

  1. Te = tumha + sa (“tumha” together with the fourth singular inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by “te” (§148)).
  2. Me = amha + sa (“amha” together with the fourth singular inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by “me” (§148)).

“Dadāmi te gāmavarāni pañca” (I give you five villages as a reward).

“Dadāhi me gāmavaraṃ” (give me a village as a reward).

“Idaṃ te raṭṭhaṃ” (this is your kingdom).

“Ayaṃ me putto” (this is my son).

What is the purpose of saying “after a word”? [This sutta does not apply when they do not come after a word, such as in] tava ñāti, mama ñāti.

149Kaccāyana Sutta. 248Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Na aṃmhi (327)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Na + aṃmhi = 2 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ yadā padasmā paresaṃ te-me-ādesā na honti aṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Passeyya taṃ vassasataṃ arogaṃ (Khu. vi, 14)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 14; so maṃ bravīti.

When ‘aṃ’ follows, no [change].
When the inflection ‘aṃ’ follows, the whole words “tumha” and “amha”, when they come after a word, together with the inflections, are not substituted by “te” and “me”.

  1. Taṃ = tumha + aṃ (here “tumha” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is not substituted by “te”, but by “taṃ” (§143)).
  2. Maṃ = amha + aṃ (here “amha” together with the inflection ‘aṃ’ is not substituted by “me”, but by “maṃ” (§143)).

“Passeyya taṃ vassasataṃ arogaṃ” (may you see him in health for a hundred years).

“So maṃ bravīti” (he speaks to me).

150Kaccāyana Sutta. 249Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Vā tatiye ca (328)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Vā + tatiye + ca = 3 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ yadā padasmā paresaṃ te-me-ādesā honti vā yathāsaṅkhyaṃ tatiy’-ekavacane pare.

Kataṃ te pāpaṃ, kataṃ me pāpaṃ, kataṃ tayā pāpaṃ, kataṃ mayā pāpaṃ.

Padato ti kimatthaṃ? Tayā kataṃ, mayā kataṃ.

And optionally, in the third [singular inflection].
Optionally, when the third singular inflection follows, the whole words “tumha” and “amha”, when they come after a word, together with the inflections, are substituted by “te” and “me” respectively.

  1. Te = tumha + nā (“tumha” together with the third singular inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by “te” (§150)).
  2. Me = amha + nā (“amha” together with the third singular inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by “me” (§150)).

“Kataṃ te pāpaṃ” (the evil done by you).

“Kataṃ me pāpaṃ” (the evil done by me).

What is the purpose of saying “after a word”? [This sutta does not apply when they do not come after a word, such as in] tayā kataṃ, mayā kataṃ.

151Kaccāyana Sutta. 250Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Bahuvacanesu vo no (329)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Bahuvacanesu + vo-no = 2 words]

Sabbesaṃ tumha-amhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ yadā padasmā paresaṃ vo-no-ādesā honti yathāsaṅkhyaṃ tatiyābahuvacanesu paresu.

Kataṃ vo kammaṃ, kataṃ no kammaṃ.

In the plural, “vo” and “no”.
When the third plural inflection follows, the whole words “tumha” and “amha”, when they come after a word, together with the inflections, are substituted by “vo” and “no” respectively.

  1. Vo = tumha + hi (“tumha” together with the third plural inflection ‘hi’ is substituted by “vo” (§151)).
  2. No = amha + hi (“amha” together with the third plural inflection ‘hi’ is substituted by “no” (§151)).

“Kataṃ vo kammaṃ” (the action done by you).

“Kataṃ no kammaṃ” (the action done by us).

152Kaccāyana Sutta. 136Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Pumantass’ ā simhi (331-2)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Puma-antassa + ā + simhi = 3 words]

Puma icc evam antassa savibhattissa ā-ādeso hoti simhi vibhattimhi.

Pumā tiṭṭhati.

Simhī ti kimatthaṃ? Pumāno tiṭṭhanti.

Antaggahaṇena maghava yuva icc evam ādīnam antassa savibhattissa ā-ādeso hoti. Maghavā, yuvā.

When ‘si’ follows, ‘ā’ of the end of “puma”.
When the inflection ‘si’ follows, the end vowel of “puma” together with the inflection is substituted by ‘ā’.

  1. Pumā = puma + si (‘a’ of “puma” together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§152)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘si’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘si’ does not follow, such as in] pumāno tiṭṭhanti.

  1. Pumāno = puma + yo (‘a’ of “puma” together with ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āno’ (§155)).

By taking “anta”, the end vowel of “maghava”, “yuva”, etc., together with the inflections is also substituted by ‘ā’.

  1. Maghavā = maghava + si (‘a’ of “maghava” together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§152)).
  2. Yuvā = yuva + si (‘a’ of “yuva” together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§152)).
153Kaccāyana Sutta. 138Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Am ālapanekavacane (333)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Aṃ + ālapana-ekavacane = 2 words]

Puma icc evam antassa savibhattissa aṃ-ādeso hoti ālapanekavacane pare.

He pumaṃ.

Ālapane ti kimatthaṃ? Pumā.

Ekavacane ti kimatthaṃ? He pumāno.

When the vocative singular follows, ‘aṃ’.
When the vocative singular follows, the end vowel of “puma” together with the inflection is substituted by ‘aṃ’.

  1. Pumaṃ = puma + si (‘a’ of “puma” together with the inflection ‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§153)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the vocative follows”? [This sutta does not apply when it is not vocative, such as in] pumā.

What is the purpose of saying “when the singular follows”? [This sutta does not apply when it is not singular, such as in] he pumāno.

154Kaccāyana Sutta. 0Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Samāse ca vibhāsā (334)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Samāse + ca + vibhāsā = 3 words]

Puma icc evam antassa samāse ca aṃ-ādeso hoti vibhāsā samāse kate.

Itthī ca pumā ca napuṃsakaṃ ca itthipumannapuṃsakāni. Itthipumannapuṃsakānaṃ samūho itthipumannapuṃsakasamūho.

Vibhāsā ti kimatthaṃ? Itthipumanapuṃsakāni.

And facultatively in a compound.
Facultatively, when a compound is formed, the end vowel of “puma” together with the inflection is substituted by ‘aṃ’.

  1. Itthipumannapuṃsakāni = itthī ca pumā ca napuṃsakaṃ ca (‘ā’ of “puma” is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§154); ‘ṃ’ is substituted by ‘n’ (§31)).

What is the purpose of saying “facultatively”? [This sutta does not always apply, such as in] itthipumanapuṃsakāni.

155Kaccāyana Sutta. 137Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yosv āno (335)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yosu + āno = 2 words]

Puma icc evam antassa savibhattissa āno-ādeso hoti yosu vibhattīsu.

Pumāno, he pumāno.

Yosv iti kimatthaṃ? Pumā.

When ‘yo’ follow, ‘āno’.
When the inflections ‘yo’ follow, the end vowel of “puma” together with the inflection is substituted by ‘āno’.

  1. Pumāno = puma + yo (‘a’ of “puma” together with ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āno’ (§155)).
  2. He pumāno = puma + yo (vocative plural; ‘a’ of “puma” together with ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āno’ (§155)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘yo’ follow”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘yo’ does not follow, such as in] pumā.

156Kaccāyana Sutta. 142Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Āne smiṃmhi vā (336)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Āne + smiṃmhi + vā = 3 words]

Puma icc evam antassa savibhattissa āne-ādeso hoti vā smiṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Pumāne, pume vā.

Optionally, when ‘smiṃ’ follows, ‘āne’.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘smiṃ’ follows, the end vowel of “puma” together with the inflection is substituted by ‘āne’.

  1. Pumāne = puma + smiṃ (‘a’ of “puma” together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘āne’ (§156)).
157Kaccāyana Sutta. 140Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Hi-vibhattimhi ca (337-8)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Hi-vibhattimhi + ca = 2 words]

Puma icc evam antassa hi vibhattimhi ca āne-ādeso hoti.

Pumānehi, pumānebhi.

Puna vibhattiggahaṇaṃ kimatthaṃ? Savibhattiggahaṇa-nivattanatthaṃ. Pumānehi.

Caggahaṇena maghava yuva icc evamādīnam antassa āna-ādeso hoti si yo aṃ yo icc etesu vibhattīsu. Puma-kamma-thāmantassa c’ ukāro hoti sa-smāsu vibhattīsu. Maghavāno. Maghavānā, maghavānaṃ, maghavāne. Yuvāno, yuvānā, yuvānaṃ, yuvāne; pumuno, pumunā. Kammuno, kammunā. Thāmuno, thāmunā.

And when the inflection ‘hi’ follows.
When the inflection ‘hi’ follows, the end vowel of “puma” is substituted by ‘āne’.

  1. Pumānehi = puma + hi (‘a’ of “puma” is substituted by ‘āne’ (§157)).

What is the purpose of taking “vibhatti” again? To prevent the inclusion of “savibhatti”35This means that, unlike the previous suttas, in this sutta only the end vowel of “puma” is substituted. in this sutta. Example: pumānehi.

By taking “ca”, when the inflections ‘si’, ‘yo’, ‘aṃ’ and ‘yo’ follow, the end vowel of “maghava”, “yuva”, etc., is substituted by ‘āna’. And when the inflections ‘sa’ and ‘smā’ follow, the [end] vowel of “puma”, “kamma” and “thāma” is substituted by the letter ‘u’.

  1. Maghavāno = maghava + si (by “ca”, ‘a’ of “maghava” is substituted by ‘āna’ (§157); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ of ‘āna’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Maghavānā = maghava + yo (by “ca”, ‘a’ of “maghava” is substituted by ‘āna’ (§157); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§107); ‘a’ of ‘āna’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Maghavānaṃ = maghava + aṃ (by “ca”, ‘a’ of “maghava” is substituted by ‘āna’ (§157); ‘a’ of ‘āna’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Maghavāne = maghava + yo (by “ca”, ‘a’ of “maghava” is substituted by ‘āna’ (§157); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§107); ‘a’ of ‘āna’ is elided (§83)).
  5. The formation of yuvāno, yuvānā, yuvānaṃ, yuvāne is similar to the previous one.
  6. Pumuno = puma + sa (by “ca”, ‘a’ of “puma” is substituted by ‘u’ (§157); ‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§117)).
  7. Pumunā = puma + smā (by “ca”, ‘a’ of “puma” is substituted by ‘u’ (§157); ‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘nā’ (§215)).
  8. The formation of kammuno, kammunā, thāmuno, thāmunā is similar to the previous one.

35This means that, unlike the previous suttas, in this sutta only the end vowel of “puma” is substituted.
158Kaccāyana Sutta. 143Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Susmim ā vā (339)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Susmiṃ + ā + vā = 3 words]

Puma icc evam antassa su icc etasmiṃ vibhattimhi ā-ādeso hoti vā.

Pumāsu, pumesu vā.

Optionally, when ‘su’ follows, [there is] ‘ā’.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘su’ follows, the end vowel of “puma” is substituted by ‘ā’.

  1. Pumāsu = puma + su (‘a’ of “puma” is substituted by ‘ā’ (§158)).
  2. Pumesu36This is the normal form. = puma + su (‘a’ of “puma” is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).

36This is the normal form.
159Kaccāyana Sutta. 139Rūpasiddhi Sutta.U nāmhi ca (340)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[U + nāmhi + ca = 3 words]

Puma icc evam antassa ā-u-ādesā honti vā nāmhi vibhattimhi.

Pumānā, pumunā, pumena vā.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And when ‘nā’ follows, [there is] ‘u’.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘nā’ follows, the end vowel of “puma” is substituted by ‘ā’ or ‘u’.

  1. Pumānā = puma + nā (‘a’ of “puma” is substituted by ‘ā’ (§159)).
  2. Pumunā = puma + nā (‘a’ of “puma” is substituted by ‘u’ (§159)).

The taking of “ca” is for dragging.37It is for the dragging of ‘ā’. ‘U’ is the primary substitution of this sutta; ‘ā’ is dragged from the previous sutta.


37It is for the dragging of ‘ā’. ‘U’ is the primary substitution of this sutta; ‘ā’ is dragged from the previous sutta.
160Kaccāyana Sutta. 197Rūpasiddhi Sutta.A kammantassa ca (341)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[A + kamma-antassa + ca = 3 words]

Kamma icc evam antassa ca u-a-ādesā honti vā nāmhi vibhattimhi.

Kammunā (Khu. i, 299)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 299, kammanā (M. ii, 408)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 408, kammena vā.

Caggahaṇena maghava yuva icc evam antassa ā-ādeso hoti kvaci nā su icc etesu vibhattīsu. Maghavānā, maghavāsu, maghavesu, maghavena vā. Yuvānā, yuvāsu, yuvesu, yuvena vā.

And [there is] ‘a’ of the end [vowel] of “kamma”.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘nā’ follows, the end vowel of “kamma” is substituted by ‘u’ or ‘a’.

  1. Kammunā = kamma + nā (‘a’ of “kamma” is substituted by ‘u’ (§160)).
  2. Kammanā = kamma + nā (‘a’ of “kamma” is substituted by ‘a’ (§160)).

By taking “ca”, sometimes, when the inflections ‘nā’ and ‘su’ follow, the end vowel of “maghava”, “yuva”, etc., is substituted by ‘ā’.

  1. Maghavānā = maghava + nā (by “ca”, ‘a’ of “maghava” is substituted by ‘ā’ (§160)).
Iti nāma-kappe dutiyo kaṇḍo
Thus ends the second section of the noun chapter
Tatiya-Kaṇḍa· Third section
161Kaccāyana Sutta. 244Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tumh’-amhehi nam ākaṃ (344)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tumha-amhehi + naṃ + ākaṃ = 3 words]

Tehi tumha-amhehi naṃvacanassa ākaṃ hoti.

Tumhākaṃ, amhākaṃ.

Naṃ iti kimatthaṃ? Tumhehi, amhehi.

After “tumha” and “amha”, ‘naṃ’ [becomes] ‘ākaṃ’.
After [the bases] “tumha” and “amha”, there is ‘ākaṃ’ of the inflection ‘naṃ’.

  1. Tumhākaṃ = tumha + naṃ (‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘ākaṃ’ (§161); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “naṃ”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘naṃ’, such as in:] Tumhehi, amhehi.

162Kaccāyana Sutta. 237Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Vā yv appaṭhamo (345)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Vā + yo + a-ppaṭhamo = 3 words]

Tehi tumha-amhehi yo appaṭhamo ākaṃ hoti vā.

Tumhākaṃ passāmi, tumhe passāmi vā. Amhākaṃ passasi, amhe passasi vā.

Yo ti kimatthaṃ? Tumhehi, amhehi.

Appaṭhamo ti kimatthaṃ? Gacchatha tumhe, gacchāma mayaṃ.

Vā ti vikappanatthena yonaṃ aṃ ānaṃ honti. Tumhaṃ, tumhānaṃ. Amhaṃ, amhānaṃ.

Optionally, ‘yo’ which is not the first.
Optionally, after [the bases] “tumha” and “amha”, ‘yo’, which is not the first [inflection], becomes ‘ākaṃ’.

  1. Tumhākaṃ = tumha + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ākaṃ’ (§162); ‘a’ of “tumha” is elided (§83)).
  2. Amhākaṃ = amha + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ākaṃ’ (§162); ‘a’ of “amha” is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “yo”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘yo’, such as in:] Tumhehi, amhehi.

What is the purpose of saying “which is not the first [inflection]”? [This sutta does not apply when it is the first inflection, such as in:] Gacchatha tumhe, gacchāma mayaṃ.

By ‘vā’, as an alternative, ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ or ‘ānaṃ’.

  1. Tumhaṃ = tumha + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§162); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Tumhānaṃ = tumha + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ānaṃ’ (§162); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
163Kaccāyana Sutta. 240Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sass’ aṃ (346)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sassa + aṃ = 2 words]

Tehi tumha-amhehi sassa vibhattissa aṃ-ādeso hoti vā.

Tumhaṃ dīyate, tava dīyate. Tumhaṃ pariggaho, tava pariggaho. Amhaṃ dīyate, mama dīyate. Amhaṃ pariggaho, mama pariggaho.

Sasse ti kimatthaṃ? Tumhesu, amhesu.

‘Aṃ’ of ‘sa’.
Optionally, after [the bases] “tumha” and “amha”, the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’.

  1. Tumhaṃ = tumha + sa (‘sa’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§163); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘sa’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘sa’, such as in:] Tumhesu, amhesu.

164Kaccāyana Sutta. 200Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbanāmakārat’ e paṭhamo (347)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbanāma-akārato + e + paṭhamo = 3 words]

Sabbesaṃ sabbanāmānaṃ akārato yo paṭhamo ettam āpajjate.

Sabbe, ye, te, ke, tumhe, amhe, ime.

Sabbanāmā ti kimatthaṃ? Devā, asurā, nāgā, gandhabbā, manussā.

Akārato ti kimatthaṃ? Amū purisā tiṭṭhanti.

Yo ti kimatthaṃ? Sabbo, yo, so, ko, ayaṃ.

Paṭhamaggahaṇaṃ uttarasuttatthaṃ.

After the letter ‘a’ of the pronouns, the first [is substituted by] ‘e’.
After the letter ‘a’ of all the pronouns, the first [inflection] ‘yo’ becomes ‘e’.

  1. Sabbe = sabba + yo (‘yo’ becomes ‘e’ (§164); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Ye = ya + yo (‘yo’ becomes ‘e’ (§164); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Te = ta + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§164); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “all the pronouns”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no pronouns, such as in:] Devā, asurā, nāgā, gandhabbā, manussā.

What is the purpose of saying “after the letter ‘a’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘a’, such as in:] Amū purisā tiṭṭhanti.

What is the purpose of saying “[the first inflection] ‘yo’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘yo’, such as in:] Sabbo, yo, so, ko, ayaṃ.

The taking of “paṭhama” is for the purpose of the following sutta.

165Kaccāyana Sutta. 208Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Dvandaṭṭhā vā (348)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Dvanda-aṭṭhā + vā = 2 words]

Tasmā sabbanām’-akārato dvandaṭṭhā yo paṭhamo ettam āpajjate vā.

Katarakatame, katarakatamā vā.

Sabbanāmā ti kimatthaṃ? Devāsuranāgagandhabbamanussā.

Dvandaṭṭhā ti kimatthaṃ? Te, sabbe.

Optionally, in a copulative compound.
Optionally, in a copulative compound, after the [end] letter ‘a’ of all the pronouns, the first [inflection] ‘yo’ becomes ‘e’.

  1. Katarakatame = katarakatama + yo (‘yo’, which is the first inflection, becomes ‘e’ (§165); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “pronouns”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no pronouns, such as in:] Devā-sura-nāga-gandhabba-manussā.

What is the purpose of saying “in a copulative compound”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no copulative compound, such as in:] Te, sabbe.

166Kaccāyana Sutta. 209Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Nāññaṃ sabbanāmikaṃ (349)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Na + aññaṃ + sabbanāmikaṃ = 3 words]

Sabbanāmikānaṃ dvandaṭṭhe nāññaṃ kāriyaṃ hoti.

Pubbāparānaṃ, pubbuttarānaṃ, adharuttarānaṃ.

No other pronominal [operation].
In a copulative compound of pronouns, [except the substitution ‘e’ of the first [inflection] ‘yo’] there is no other grammatical operation [such as the other substitutions ‘saṃ’, ‘sānaṃ’, etc.].

  1. Pubbāparānaṃ = pubbāpara + naṃ (here ‘naṃ’ does not become ‘saṃ’, ‘sānaṃ’, etc. (§166)).
167Kaccāyana Sutta. 210Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Bahubbīhimhi ca (351-2)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Bahubbīhimhi + ca = 2 words]

Bahubbīhimhi ca samāse sabbanāmavidhānañ ca nāññaṃ kāriyaṃ hoti.

Piyapubbāya, piyapubbānaṃ, piyapubbe, piyapubbassa.

Ce ti kimatthaṃ? Sabbanāmavidhānaṃ hoti. Dakkhiṇapubbassaṃ, dakkhiṇapubbassā, uttarapubbassaṃ, uttarapubbassā.

And in a relative compound.
And in a relative compound, [except the substitution ‘e’ of the first [inflection] ‘yo’] there is no other grammatical operation nor pronominal procedure [such as the substitutions ‘saṃ’, ‘sānaṃ’, etc.].

  1. Piyapubbāya = piyapubbā + smiṃ (here ‘smiṃ’ does not become ‘saṃ’ or ‘sā’; ‘ā’ of “pubbā” is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘āya’ (§111); ‘ā’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “ca”? [To allow another] pronominal procedure.

  1. Dakkhiṇapubbassaṃ = dakkhiṇapubba + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘saṃ’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§63)).
168Kaccāyana Sutta. 203Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbato naṃ saṃ-sānaṃ (353, 368)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbato + naṃ + saṃ-sānaṃ = 3 words]

Sabbato sabbanāmato naṃvacanassa saṃ sānaṃ icc ete ādesā honti.

Sabbesaṃ, sabbesānaṃ, sabbāsaṃ, sabbāsānaṃ. Yesaṃ, yesānaṃ, yāsaṃ, yāsānaṃ. Tesaṃ, tesānaṃ, tāsaṃ, tāsānaṃ. Kesaṃ, kesānaṃ, kāsaṃ, kāsānaṃ. Imesaṃ, imesānaṃ, imāsaṃ, imāsānaṃ. Amūsaṃ, amūsānaṃ.

Nam iti kimatthaṃ? Sabbassa, yassa, tassa, kassa. Evaṃ sabbattha.

After all [the pronouns], ‘naṃ’ [is substituted by] ‘saṃ’ and ‘sānaṃ’.
After all the pronouns, the inflection ‘naṃ’ is substituted by ‘saṃ’ and ‘sānaṃ’.
What is the purpose of saying ‘naṃ’? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘naṃ’, such as in:] Sabbassa, yassa, tassa, kassa. Thus everywhere.

  1. Sabbesaṃ = sabba + naṃ (‘naṃ’ becomes ‘saṃ’ (§168); ‘a’ of “sabba” is substituted by ‘e’ (§102)).
  2. Sabbesānaṃ = sabba + naṃ (‘naṃ’ becomes ‘sānaṃ’ (§168); ‘a’ of “sabba” is substituted by ‘e’ (§102)).
169Kaccāyana Sutta. 117Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Rājassa rāju su-naṃ-hisu ca (354)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Rājassa + rāju + su-naṃ-hisu + ca = 4 words]

Sabbass’ eva rājasaddassa rāju-ādeso hoti su naṃ hi icc etesu.

Rājūsu, rājūnaṃ, rājūhi, rājūbhi.

Su-naṃ-hi-sv iti kimatthaṃ? Rājā.

Caggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ. Rājesu, rājānaṃ, rājehi, rājebhi.

And when ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘hi’ follow, [there is] “rāju” of “rāja”.
When the inflections ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘hi’ follow, the whole base “rāja” is substituted by “rāju”.

  1. Rājūsu = rāja + su (“rāja” is substituted by “rāju” (§169); ‘u’ is lengthened (§89)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘hi’ follow”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘hi’ do not follow, such as in:] Rājā.

The taking of “ca” is for restricting [the scope of this sutta]. Rājesu, rājānaṃ, rājehi, rājebhi.

170Kaccāyana Sutta. 220Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbass’ imass e vā (356)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbassa + imassa + e + vā = 4 words]

Sabbass’ eva imasaddassa ekāro hoti vā su naṃ hi icc etesu.

Esu, imesu; esaṃ, imesaṃ; ehi, ebhi, imehi, imebhi.

Imasse ti kimatthaṃ? Etesu, etesaṃ, etehi, etebhi.

Optionally, [there is] ‘e’ of the whole [base] “ima”.
Optionally, when the inflections ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘hi’ follow, the whole base “ima” becomes “e”.

  1. Esu = ima + su (“ima” becomes “e” (§170)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘ima’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “ima”, such as in:] Etesu, etesaṃ, etehi, etebhi.

171Kaccāyana Sutta. 219Rūpasiddhi Sutta.An’-imi nāmhi ca (357)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ana-imi + nāmhi + ca = 3 words]

Imasaddassa sabbass’ eva ana imi icc ete ādesā honti nāmhi vibhattimhi.

Anena dhammadānena. Sukhitā hotu sā pajā. Iminā Buddhapūjena patvā amataṃ padaṃ.

Nāmhī ti kimatthaṃ? Imesu, imesaṃ, imehi, imebhi.

And when ‘nā’ follows, [there are] ‘ana’ and ‘imi’.
When the inflection ‘nā’ follows, the whole base “ima” is substituted by “ana” or “imi”.

  1. Anena = ima + nā (“ima” is substituted by “ana” (§171); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ena’ (§103); ‘a’ of “ana” is elided (§83)).
  2. Iminā = ima + nā (“ima” is substituted by “imi” (§171)).
  1. Anena dhammadānena. Sukhitā hotu sā pajā. (By this gift of the Dhamma, may that community [of beings] be happy.)
  2. Iminā Buddhapūjena patvā amataṃ padaṃ. (Having reached the deathless state [of Nibbāna] by means of this veneration of the Buddha.)

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘nā’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘nā’ does not follow, such as in:] Imesu, imesaṃ, imehi, imebhi.

172Kaccāyana Sutta. 218Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Anapuṃsakassāyaṃ simhi (306-7, 358)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Anapuṃsakassa + ayaṃ + simhi = 3 words]

Imasaddassa sabbass’ eva anapuṃsakassa ayaṃ-ādeso hoti simhi vibhattimhi.

Ayaṃ puriso, ayaṃ itthī.

Anapuṃsakasse ti kimatthaṃ? Idaṃ cittaṃ tiṭṭhati.

Simhī ti kimatthaṃ? Imaṃ purisaṃ passasi tvaṃ.

When ‘si’ follows, [there is] ‘ayaṃ’ of the non-neuter [base].
When the inflection ‘si’ follows, the whole base “ima”, which is not neuter, is substituted by “ayaṃ”.

  1. Ayaṃ = ima + si (“ima” is substituted by “ayaṃ” (§172); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  1. Ayaṃ puriso (This man.)
  2. Ayaṃ itthī (This woman.)

What is the purpose of saying “of the non-neuter [base]”? [This sutta does not apply when the [base] is neuter, such as in:] Idaṃ cittaṃ tiṭṭhati (This mind remains.)

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘si’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘si’ does not follow, such as in:] Imaṃ purisaṃ passasi tvaṃ (You see this man.)

173Kaccāyana Sutta. 223Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Amussa mo saṃ (359)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Amussa + mo + saṃ = 3 words]

Amusaddassa anapuṃsakassa makāro sakāram āpajjate vā simhi vibhattimhi.

Asu (M. ii, 175)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 175 rājā; asu itthī; amuko rājā; amukā itthī.

Anapuṃsakasse ti kimatthaṃ? Aduṃ (Khu. v, 34)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 34 pupphaṃ virocati.

Amusse ti kimatthaṃ? Ayaṃ puriso tiṭṭhati.

Simhī ti kimatthaṃ? Amhaṃ (M. i, 211)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. i, p. 211 purisaṃ passasi.

‘M’ of “amu” [becomes] ‘s’.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘si’ follows, ‘m’ of the base “amu”, which is not neuter, becomes ‘s’.

  1. Asu = amu + si (‘m’ of “amu” becomes ‘s’ (§173); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  1. Asu rājā (Such a king.)
  2. Asu itthī (Such a woman.)
  3. Amuko rājā (Such a king.)
  4. Amukā itthī (Such a woman.)

What is the purpose of saying “of the non-neuter [base]”? [This sutta does not apply when the [base] is neuter, such as in:] Aduṃ pupphaṃ virocati (such a flower shines.)

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘amu’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “amu”, such as in:] Ayaṃ puriso tiṭṭhati (This man remains.)

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘si’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘si’ does not follow, such as in:] Amhaṃ purisaṃ passasi (You see our man.)

174Kaccāyana Sutta. 211Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Eta-tesaṃ to (360)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Eta-tesaṃ + to = 2 words]

Eta ta icc etesaṃ anapuṃsakānaṃ takāro sakāram āpajjate simhi vibhattimhi.

Eso puriso, esā itthī; so puriso, sā itthī.

Eta-tesam iti kimatthaṃ? Itaro puriso, itarā itthī.

Anapuṃsakānam iti kimatthaṃ? Etaṃ cittaṃ, etaṃ rūpaṃ; taṃ cittaṃ, taṃ rūpaṃ.

‘T’ of “eta” and “ta”.
When the inflection ‘si’ follows, ‘t’ of “eta” and “ta”, which are not neuter, becomes ‘s’.

  1. Eso = eta + si (‘t’ of “eta” becomes ‘s’ (§174); ‘si’ becomes ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ of “esa” is elided (§83)).
  2. So = ta + si (‘t’ of “ta” becomes ‘s’ (§174); ‘si’ becomes ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ of “sa” is elided (§83)).
  1. Eso puriso (That man.)
  2. Esā itthī (That woman.)
  3. So puriso (That man.)
  4. Sā itthī (That woman.)

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘eta’ and ‘ta’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “eta” or “ta”, such as in:] Itaro puriso, itarā itthī. (Another man, another woman.)

What is the purpose of saying “which are not neuter”? [This sutta does not apply when they are neuter, such as in:] Etaṃ cittaṃ, etaṃ rūpaṃ; taṃ cittaṃ, taṃ rūpaṃ. (That mind, that form; this mind, this form.)

175Kaccāyana Sutta. 212Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tassa vā nattaṃ sabbattha (361)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tassa + vā + nattaṃ + sabbattha = 4 words]

Tassa sabbanāmassa takārassa nattaṃ hoti vā sabbattha liṅgesu.

Nāya, tāya; naṃ (Khu. i, 308)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 308, taṃ; ne (DhA. i, 6)Dhammapada-aṭṭhakathā · vol. i, p. 6, te; nesu, tesu; namhi, tamhi; nāhi, tāhi; nābhi, tābhi.

Optionally, everywhere, [there is] ‘n’ of ‘t’.
Optionally, in all the genders, the letter ‘t’ of the pronoun “ta” becomes ‘n’.

  1. Nāya = tā + nā (‘t’ of “ta” becomes ‘n’ (§175); ‘nā’ becomes ‘āya’ (§111); ‘ā’ of “nā” is elided (§83)).
  2. Naṃ = ta + aṃ (‘t’ of “ta” becomes ‘n’ (§175); ‘a’ of ‘na’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Ne = ta + yo (‘t’ of “ta” becomes ‘n’ (§175); ‘yo’ becomes ‘e’ (§164); ‘a’ of “na” is elided (§83)).
  4. Nesu = ta + su (‘t’ of “ta” becomes ‘n’ (§175); ‘a’ of “na” becomes ‘e’ (§101)).
  5. Namhi = ta + smiṃ (‘t’ of “ta” becomes ‘n’ (§175); ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘mhi’ (§99)).
  6. Nāhi = tā + hi (‘t’ of “tā” becomes ‘n’ (§175)).
  7. Nābhi = tā + hi (‘t’ of “tā” becomes ‘n’ (§175); ‘hi’ becomes ‘bhi’ (§99)).

Parallel forms (with §175 applied / not applied):

  1. Nāya, tāya
  2. Naṃ, taṃ
  3. Ne, te
  4. Nesu, tesu
  5. Namhi, tamhi
  6. Nāhi, tāhi
  7. Nābhi, tābhi
176Kaccāyana Sutta. 213Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sa-smā-smiṃ-saṃ-sāsv attaṃ (362, 368)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sa-smā-smiṃ-saṃ-sāsu + attaṃ = 2 words]

Tassa sabbanāmassa takārassa sabbass’ eva attaṃ hoti vā sa smā smiṃ saṃ sā icc etesu sabbattha liṅgesu.

Assa, tassa; asmā, tasmā; asmiṃ, tasmiṃ; assaṃ, tassaṃ; assā, tassā.

Takārasse ti kimatthaṃ? Amussaṃ, amussā.

Etesv iti kimatthaṃ? Nesu, tesu.

When ‘sa’, ‘smā’, ‘smiṃ’, ‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’ follow, [there is] ‘a’.
Optionally, in all the genders, when the inflections ‘sa’, ‘smā’, ‘smiṃ’, ‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’ follow, the whole [base] “ta” of the pronoun “ta” becomes ‘a’.

  1. Assa = ta + sa (“ta” becomes “a” (§176); ‘s’ is inserted (§61)).
  2. Asmā = ta + smā (“ta” becomes “a” (§176)).
  3. Asmiṃ = ta + smiṃ (“ta” becomes “a” (§176)).
  4. Assaṃ = tā + smiṃ (‘ā’ of “tā” is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘saṃ’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ of “tā” is shortened (§66); “ta” becomes “a” (§176)).
  5. Assā = tā + sa (‘ā’ of “tā” is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘sa’ becomes ‘sā’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ of “tā” is shortened (§66); “ta” becomes “a” (§176)).

Parallel forms (with §176 applied / not applied):

  1. Assa, tassa
  2. Asmā, tasmā
  3. Asmiṃ, tasmiṃ
  4. Assaṃ, tassaṃ
  5. Assā, tassā

What is the purpose of saying “the letter ‘t’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “t”, such as in:] Amussaṃ, amussā.

What is the purpose of saying “when these [inflections] follow”? [This sutta does not apply when these inflections do not follow, such as in:] Nesu, tesu.

177Kaccāyana Sutta. 221Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Imasaddassa ca (363)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Imasaddassa + ca = 2 words]

Imasaddassa ca sabbass’ eva attaṃ hoti vā sa smā smiṃ saṃ sā icc etesu sabbattha liṅgesu.

Assa, imassa; asmā, imasmā; asmiṃ, imasmiṃ; assaṃ, imissaṃ; assā, imissā.

Imasaddasse ti kimatthaṃ? Etissaṃ, etissā.

And of the [base] “ima”.
Optionally, in all the genders, when the inflections ‘sa’, ‘smā’, ‘smiṃ’, ‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’ follow, the whole [base] “ima” also becomes ‘a’.

  1. Assa = ima + sa (“ima” becomes “a” (§177); ‘s’ is inserted (§61)).
  2. Asmā = ima + smā (“ima” becomes “a” (§177)).
  3. Asmiṃ = ima + smiṃ (“ima” becomes “a” (§177)).
  4. Assaṃ = imā + smiṃ (‘ā’ of “imā” is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘saṃ’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); “ima” becomes “a” (§177)).
  5. Assā = imā + sa (‘ā’ of “imā” is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘sa’ becomes ‘sā’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); “ima” becomes “a” (§177)).

Parallel forms (with §177 applied / not applied):

  1. Assa, imassa
  2. Asmā, imasmā
  3. Asmiṃ, imasmiṃ
  4. Assaṃ, imissaṃ
  5. Assā, imissā

What is the purpose of saying “of the [base] ‘ima’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “ima”, such as in:] Etissaṃ, etissā.

178Kaccāyana Sutta. 224Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbato ko (364)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbato + ko = 2 words]

Sabbato sabbanāmato kakārāgamo hoti vā simhi vibhattimhi.

Sabbako, yako, sako, amuko, asuko (A. i, 73)Aṅguttara-nikāya · vol. i, p. 73.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Sabbo, yo, so, ko.

Sabbanāmato ti kimatthaṃ? Puriso.

Puna sabbatoggahaṇena aññasmā pi kakārāgamo hoti. Hīnako, potako.

After all, ‘ka’ [is inserted].
Optionally, when the inflection ‘si’ follows, after all the pronouns, ‘ka’ is inserted.

  1. Sabbako = sabba + si (‘ka’ is inserted (§178); ‘si’ becomes ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ of ‘ka’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Yako = ya + si (‘ka’ is inserted (§178); ‘si’ becomes ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ of ‘ka’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Sako = sa + si (‘ka’ is inserted (§178); ‘si’ becomes ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ of ‘ka’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Amuko = amu + si (‘ka’ is inserted (§178); ‘si’ becomes ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ of ‘ka’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Asuko = amu + si (‘m’ of “amu” becomes ‘s’ (§173); ‘ka’ is inserted (§178); ‘si’ becomes ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ of ‘ka’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [To allow exceptions to this rule, such as in:] Sabbo, yo, so, ko.

What is the purpose of saying “after the pronouns”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no pronouns, such as in:] Puriso.

By taking “sabbato” again, ‘ka’ is also inserted in other [places]. Examples: Hīnako, potako.

179Kaccāyana Sutta. 204Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Gha-pato smiṃ-sānaṃ saṃ-sā (365)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Gha-pato + smiṃ-sānaṃ + saṃ-sā = 3 words]

Sabbato sabbanāmato gha-pasaññato smiṃ sa icc etesaṃ saṃ-sā-ādesā honti vā yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Sabbassaṃ, sabbassā; sabbāyaṃ, sabbāya. Imissaṃ, imissā (Abhi. ii, 254)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 254; imāyaṃ, imāya. Amussaṃ, amussā (M. iii, 10)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. iii, p. 10; amuyaṃ, amuyā.

Sabbanāmato ti kimatthaṃ? Itthiyaṃ, itthiyā.

Smiṃ-sānam iti kimatthaṃ? Amuyo.

‘Saṃ’ and ‘sā’ of ‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’ after ‘gha’ and ‘pa’.
Optionally, after all the pronouns named ‘gha’ and ‘pa’, ‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’ become ‘saṃ’ and ‘sā’ respectively.

  1. Sabbassaṃ = sabbā + smiṃ (‘ā’ of “sabbā” is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘saṃ’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ is shortened (§66)).

What is the purpose of saying “after the pronouns”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no pronouns, such as in:] Itthiyaṃ, itthiyā.

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘smiṃ’ and ‘sa’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘smiṃ’ or ‘sa’, such as in:] Amuyo.

180Kaccāyana Sutta. 207Rūpasiddhi Sutta.N’ etāhi smim āya-yā (369-70)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Na + etāhi + smim + āya-yā = 4 words]

Etehi sabbanāmehi gha-pasaññehi smiṃvacanassa n’ eva āya-yādesā honti.

Etissaṃ, etāyaṃ; imissaṃ, imāyaṃ; amussaṃ, amuyaṃ.

Smin ti kimatthaṃ? Tāya itthiyā mukhaṃ.

Etahī ti kimatthaṃ? Kaññāya, vīṇāya, gaṅgāya, kapālikāya.

After these, ‘smiṃ’ does not [become] ‘āya’ or ‘yā’.
The inflection ‘smiṃ’, which follows the pronouns named ‘gha’ and ‘pa’, does not become ‘āya’ or ‘yā’.

  1. Etissaṃ = etā + smiṃ (‘ā’ of “etā” is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘smiṃ’ does not become ‘āya’ or ‘yā’ (§180); ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘saṃ’ (§179); ‘s’ is inserted (§62); ‘ā’ of “etā” becomes ‘i’ (§63)).

What is the purpose of saying “‘smiṃ’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘smiṃ’, such as in:] Tāya itthiyā mukhaṃ. (The face of that woman.)

What is the purpose of saying “after these [pronouns]”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘smiṃ’ does not follow the pronouns, such as in:] Kaññāya, vīṇāya, gaṅgāya, kapālikāya.

181Kaccāyana Sutta. 95Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Manogaṇādito smiṃ-nānam i ā (373)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Manogaṇādito + smiṃ-nānaṃ + i-ā = 3 words]

Tasmā manogaṇādito smiṃ nā icc etesaṃ ikāra-ākārādesā honti vā yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Manasi (D. i, 12)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. i, p. 12, manasmiṃ; sirasi, sirasmiṃ; manasā (Khu. i, 13)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 13, manena; vacasā (A. i, 504)Aṅguttara-nikāya · vol. i, p. 504, vacena; sirasā (M. ii, 406)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 406, sirena; sarasā, sarena; tapasā (Khu. ii, 128)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 128, tapena; vayasā (D. ii, 125)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 125, vayena; yasasā (Khu. ii, 73)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 73, yasena; tejasā (Khu. ii, 135)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 135, tejena; urasā (M. ii, 409)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 409, urena; thāmasā, thāmena.

Smiṃ-nānam iti kimatthaṃ? Mano, siro, tamo, tapo, tejo.

Ādiggahaṇena aññāsmā pi smiṃ-nānaṃ ikāra-ākārādesā honti. Bilasi, bilasā; padasi, padasā.

After the group “mano” and others, [there are] ‘i’ and ‘ā’ of ‘smiṃ’ and ‘nā’.
Optionally, after the group “mano” and others, the inflections ‘smiṃ’ and ‘nā’ are substituted by ‘i’ and ‘ā’ respectively.

  1. Manasi = mana + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘i’ (§181); ‘s’ is inserted (§184)).
  2. Manasā = mana + nā (‘nā’ becomes ‘ā’ (§181); ‘s’ is inserted (§184)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘smiṃ’ and ‘nā’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘smiṃ’ or ‘nā’, such as in:] Mano, siro, tamo, tapo, tejo.

By taking “ādi”, also after other [bases], ‘smiṃ’ and ‘nā’ become ‘i’ and ‘ā’. Examples: Bilasi, bilasā; padasi, padasā.

182Kaccāyana Sutta. 97Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sassa c’ o (374)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sassa + ca + o = 3 words]

Tasmā manogaṇādito sassa ca okāro hoti.

Manaso (Khu. ii, 14)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 14, thāmaso, tapaso.

And ‘o’ of ‘sa’.
After the group “mano” and others, the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by the letter ‘o’.

  1. Manaso = mana + sa (‘sa’ becomes ‘o’ (§182); ‘s’ is inserted (§184)).
183Kaccāyana Sutta. 48Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Etesam o lope (375)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Etesaṃ + o + lope = 3 words]

Etesaṃ manogaṇādīnaṃ anto ottam āpajjate vibhattilope kate.

Manomayaṃ (D. i, 73)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. i, p. 73, ayomayaṃ (Khu. i, 383)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 383, tejosamena, tapoguṇena, siroruhena.

Ādiggahaṇaṃ kimatthaṃ? Aññesam anto ottam āpajjate. Āposamena, vāyosamena.

Lope ti kimatthaṃ? Padasā, tapasā (Khu. ii, 121)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 121, yasasā (Khu. ii, 73)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 73, vacasā (A. i, 504)Aṅguttara-nikāya · vol. i, p. 504, manasā (Khu. i, 13)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 13. Evaṃ aññe pi yojetabbā.

When there is elision, [there is] ‘o’ of these.
When the inflection is elided, the end [vowel] of the group “mano” and others becomes ‘o’.
This example will be given in Chapter 5.38Taddhita-Kappa.
What is the purpose of taking “ādi”? The end [vowel] of other words becomes ‘o’. Āposamena, vāyosamena.
What is the purpose of saying “when [the inflection] is elided”? [This sutta does not apply when the inflection is not elided, such as in:] Padasā, tapasā, yasasā, vacasā, manasā. Thus the others are also to be formed.

38Taddhita-Kappa.
184Kaccāyana Sutta. 96Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sa sare v’ āgamo (376)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sa + sare + vā + āgamo = 4 words]

Eteh’ eva manogaṇādīhi vibhattādese sare pare sakārāgamo hoti vā.

Manasā, vacasā; manasi, vacasi.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Manena, tejena, yasena.

Sare ti kimatthaṃ? Mano, tejo, yaso.

Puna ādiggahaṇena aññasmim pi paccaye pare sakārāgamo hoti. Mānasikaṃ, vācasikaṃ (Abhi. ii, 255)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 255.

Optionally, when there is a vowel, [there is] insertion of ‘s’.
Optionally, after the group “mano” and others, when the vowel substitution of the inflection takes place, ‘s’ is inserted.

  1. Manasā = mana + nā (‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§181); ‘s’ is inserted (§184)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [To allow exceptions to this sutta, such as in:] Manena, tejena, yasena.

What is the purpose of saying “when there is a vowel”? [This sutta does not apply when the vowel substitution of the inflection does not take place, such as in:] Mano, tejo, yaso.39This should not be here. The Nyāsa does not comment on it either.

By taking “ādi” again, ‘s’ is also inserted when other suffixes follow. Mānasikaṃ, vācasikaṃ.


39This should not be here. The Nyāsa does not comment on it either.
185Kaccāyana Sutta. 112Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Santasaddassa so bhe bo c’ ante (378)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Santasaddassa + so + bhe + bo + ca + ante = 6 words]

Sabbassa santasaddassa sakārādeso hoti bhakāre pare, ante ca bakārāgamo hoti.

Sabbhir eva samāsetha,
Sabbhi kubbetha santhavaṃ,
Sataṃ saddhammam aññāya,
Seyyo hoti na pāpiyo (S. i, 16)Saṃyutta-nikāya · vol. i, p. 16.
One should associate only with the good, one should cultivate intimacy with the good; having understood the true Dhamma of the good, one becomes better, not worse.
Jīranti ve rājaratha sucittā,
Atho sarīram pi jaraṃ upeti,
Satañ ca dhammo na jaraṃ upeti,
Santo have sabbhi pavedayanti (Khu. i, 36)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 36.
The well-adorned chariots of kings wear out, and the body too comes to old age. But the Dhamma of the good does not come to old age; this the good proclaim among the good.40Dhp verse 151.

Sabbhūto (being good), sabbhāvo (state/condition of the good).

Bhe ti kimatthaṃ? Santehi pūjito Bhagavā.

Caggahaṇaṃ kvaci sakārass’ eva pasiddhatthaṃ. Sakkāro, sakkato.

When ‘bh’ follows, [there is] ‘sa’ of the word “santa”, and ‘b’ at the end.
When ‘bh’ follows, the whole word “santa” is substituted by ‘sa’, and at the end ‘b’ is inserted.

  1. Sabbhi = santa + hi (‘hi’ is substituted by ‘bhi’ (§99); “santa” is substituted by ‘sa’ (§185); ‘b’ is inserted (§185)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘bh’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘bh’ does not follow, such as in:] Santehi pūjito Bhagavā.

The taking of “ca” is, sometimes, for the substitution by ‘sa’ alone to take place.41“Ca” is for the substitution by ‘sa’ and not ‘b’. Sakkāro, sakkato.


40Dhp verse 151.
41“Ca” is for the substitution by ‘sa’ and not ‘b’.
186Kaccāyana Sutta. 107Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Simhi gacchantādīnaṃ ntasaddo aṃ (382-4)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Simhi + gacchanta-ādīnaṃ + nta-saddo + aṃ = 4 words]

Simhi gacchantādīnaṃ ntasaddo am āpajjate vā.

Gacchaṃ, gacchanto; mahaṃ, mahanto; caraṃ, caranto; khādaṃ, khādanto.

Gacchantādīnam iti kimatthaṃ? Anto, danto, vanto, santo.

When ‘si’ follows, the suffix ‘nta’ of “gacchanta” and others [becomes] ‘aṃ’.
Optionally, when [the inflection] ‘si’ follows, the suffix ‘nta’ of “gacchanta” and others becomes ‘aṃ’.

  1. Gacchaṃ = gacchanta + si (‘nta’ becomes ‘aṃ’ (§186); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Gacchanto = gacchanta + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Mahaṃ = mahanta + si (‘nta’ becomes ‘aṃ’ (§186); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Mahanto = mahanta + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Caraṃ = caranta + si (‘nta’ becomes ‘aṃ’ (§186); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Caranto = caranta + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  7. Khādaṃ = khādanta + si (‘nta’ becomes ‘aṃ’ (§186); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  8. Khādanto = khādanta + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘gacchanta’ and others”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “gacchanta” and others, such as in:] Anto, danto, vanto, santo.

187Kaccāyana Sutta. 108Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sesesu ntu ’va (385-8)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sesesu + ntu + iva = 3 words]

Gacchantādīnaṃ ntasaddo ntuppaccayo ’va daṭṭhabbo sesesu vibhattippaccayesu.

Gacchato, mahato; gacchati, mahati, gacchatā, mahatā.

Sesesv iti kimatthaṃ? Gacchaṃ, mahaṃ, caraṃ, khādaṃ.

When the remaining [inflections] follow, like ‘ntu’.
When the remaining inflections follow, the suffix ‘nta’ of “gacchanta” and others is to be regarded as ‘ntu’.

  1. Gacchato = gacchanta + sa (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘to’ (§127)).
  2. Mahato = mahanta + sa (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘to’ (§127)).
  3. Gacchati = gacchanta + smiṃ (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ti’ (§127)).
  4. Mahati = mahanta + smiṃ (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ti’ (§127)).
  5. Gacchatā = gacchanta + nā (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘tā’ (§127)).
  6. Mahatā = mahanta + nā (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘tā’ (§127)).
  7. Carato = caranta + sa (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘to’ (§127)).
  8. Carati = caranta + smiṃ (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ti’ (§127)).
  9. Caratā = caranta + nā (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘tā’ (§127)).
  10. Khādato = khādanta + sa (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘to’ (§127)).
  11. Khādati = khādanta + smiṃ (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ti’ (§127)).
  12. Khādatā = khādanta + nā (‘nta’ is regarded as ‘ntu’ (§187); ‘ntu’ together with the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘tā’ (§127)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the remaining [inflections] follow”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘si’ follows, such as in:] Gacchaṃ, mahaṃ, caraṃ, khādaṃ.

188Kaccāyana Sutta. 115Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Brahm’-atta-sakha-rājādito am ānaṃ (393)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Brahma-atta-sakha-rāja-ādito + aṃ + ānaṃ = 3 words]

Brahma atta sakha rāja icc evamādito aṃvacanassa ānaṃ hoti vā.

Brahmānaṃ, brahmaṃ; attānaṃ, attaṃ; sakhānaṃ, sakhaṃ; rājānaṃ, rājaṃ.

Am iti kimatthaṃ? Rājā.

‘Aṃ’ of “brahma”, “atta”, “sakha”, “rāja”, etc., [becomes] ‘ānaṃ’.
Optionally, after “brahma”, “atta”, “sakha”, “rāja”, etc., the inflection ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘ānaṃ’.

  1. Brahmānaṃ = brahma + aṃ (‘aṃ’ is substituted by ‘ānaṃ’ (§188); ‘a’ of “brahma” is elided (§83)).
  2. Brahmaṃ = brahma + aṃ (‘a’ of “brahma” is elided (§83)).
  3. Attānaṃ = atta + aṃ (‘aṃ’ is substituted by ‘ānaṃ’ (§188); ‘a’ of “atta” is elided (§83)).
  4. Attaṃ = atta + aṃ (‘a’ of “atta” is elided (§83)).
  5. Sakhānaṃ = sakha + aṃ (‘aṃ’ is substituted by ‘ānaṃ’ (§188); ‘a’ of “sakha” is elided (§83)).
  6. Sakhaṃ = sakha + aṃ (‘a’ of “sakha” is elided (§83)).
  7. Rājānaṃ = rāja + aṃ (‘aṃ’ is substituted by ‘ānaṃ’ (§188); ‘a’ of “rāja” is elided (§83)).
  8. Rājaṃ = rāja + aṃ (‘a’ of “rāja” is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying ‘aṃ’? [This sutta does not apply when ‘aṃ’ does not follow, such as in:] rājā.

189Kaccāyana Sutta. 113Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sy ā ca (390-1)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Si + ā + ca = 3 words]

Brahma atta sakha rāja icc evamādito sivacanassa ā ca hoti.

Brahmā, attā, sakhā, rājā, ātumā.

And ‘si’ [becomes] ‘ā’.
And after “brahma”, “atta”, “sakha”, “rāja”, etc., the inflection ‘si’ becomes ‘ā’.

  1. Brahmā = brahma + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§189); ‘a’ of “brahma” is elided (§83)).
  2. Attā = atta + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§189); ‘a’ of “atta” is elided (§83)).
  3. Sakhā = sakha + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§189); ‘a’ of “sakha” is elided (§83)).
  4. Rājā = rāja + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§189); ‘a’ of “rāja” is elided (§83)).
  5. Ātumā = ātuma + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§189); ‘a’ of “ātuma” is elided (§83)).
190Kaccāyana Sutta. 114Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yonam āno (392)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yonaṃ + āno = 2 words]

Brahma atta sakha rāja icc evamādito yonaṃ āno-ādeso hoti.

Brahmāno, attāno, sakhāno, rājāno, ātumāno.

‘Āno’ of ‘yo’.
After “brahma”, “atta”, “sakha”, “rāja”, etc., the inflection ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āno’.

  1. Brahmāno = brahma + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āno’ (§190); ‘a’ of “brahma” is elided (§83)).
  2. Attāno = atta + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āno’ (§190); ‘a’ of “atta” is elided (§83)).
  3. Sakhāno = sakha + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āno’ (§190); ‘a’ of “sakha” is elided (§83)).
  4. Rājāno = rāja + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āno’ (§190); ‘a’ of “rāja” is elided (§83)).
  5. Ātumāno = ātuma + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āno’ (§190); ‘a’ of “ātuma” is elided (§83)).
191Kaccāyana Sutta. 130Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sakhato42Sakhāto (Sī). c’ āyo no (394)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sakhato + ca + āyo-no = 3 words]

Tasmā sakhato ca yonaṃ āyo-no-ādesā honti.

Sakhāyo, sakhino. Yonam iti kimatthaṃ? Sakhā.

And after “sakha”, [there are] ‘āyo’ and ‘no’.
And after “sakha”, [the inflection] ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āyo’ and ‘no’.

  1. Sakhāyo = sakha + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘āyo’ (§191); ‘a’ of “sakha” is elided (§83)).
  2. Sakhino = sakha + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§191); ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘i’ (§194)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘yo’”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘yo’ does not follow, such as in:] sakhā.


42Sakhāto (Sī).
192Kaccāyana Sutta. 135Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Smim e
[Smiṃ + e = 2 words]

Tasmā sakhato smiṃvacanassa ekāro hoti.

Sakhe.

‘Smiṃ’ [becomes] ‘e’.
After “sakha”, the inflection ‘smiṃ’ becomes the letter ‘e’.

  1. Sakhe = sakha + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§192); ‘a’ of “sakha” is elided (§83)).
193Kaccāyana Sutta. 122Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Brahmato gassa ca (287)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Brahmato + gassa + ca = 3 words]

Tasmā brahmato gassa ca ekāro hoti.

He brahme.43Translator's note: In the example he brahme, he is a vocative particle associated with brahme. It is that function that invokes the application of ‘ga’, since §57 · Ālapane si gasañño — In the vocative, ‘si’ is named ‘ga’.">§57 (Ālapane si gasañño) assigns it to ‘si’ only in the vocative.

And after “brahma”, [there is ‘e’] of ‘ga’.
And after “brahma”, ‘ga’ becomes ‘e’.

  1. Brahme = brahma + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ga’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§193); ‘a’ of “brahma” is elided (§83)).

43Translator's note: In the example he brahme, he is a vocative particle associated with brahme. It is that function that invokes the application of ‘ga’, since §57 (Ālapane si gasañño) assigns it to ‘si’ only in the vocative.
194Kaccāyana Sutta. 131Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sakhantass’ i no-nā-naṃ-sesu (407)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sakha-antassa + i + no-nā-naṃ-sesu = 3 words]

Tassa sakhantassa ikāro hoti no nā naṃ sa icc etesu.

Sakhino, sakhinā, sakhīnaṃ, sakhissa.

Etesv iti kimatthaṃ? Sakhārehi.

When ‘no’, ‘nā’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘sa’ follow, [there is] ‘i’ of the end of “sakha”.
When [the inflections] ‘no’, ‘nā’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘sa’ follow, the end [vowel] of “sakha” becomes the letter ‘i’.

  1. Sakhino = sakha + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§191); the end ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘i’ (§194)).
  2. Sakhinā = sakha + nā (the end ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘i’ (§194)).
  3. Sakhīnaṃ = sakha + naṃ (the end ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘i’ (§194); ‘i’ is lengthened (§89)).
  4. Sakhissa = sakha + sa (the end ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘i’ (§194); ‘s’ is inserted (§61)).

What is the purpose of saying “when the [inflections ‘no’, ‘nā’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘sa’] follow”? [This sutta does not apply when these inflections do not follow, such as in:] sakhārehi.

195Kaccāyana Sutta. 134Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Āro himhi vā (408)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Āro + himhi + vā = 3 words]

Tassa sakhantassa āro hoti vā himhi vibhattimhi.

Sakhārehi, sakhehi.

Optionally, when ‘hi’ follows, [there is] ‘āra’.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘hi’ follows, the end [vowel] of “sakha” becomes ‘āra’.

  1. Sakhārehi = sakha + hi (the end ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘āra’ (§195); ‘a’ of ‘āra’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
  2. Sakhehi = sakha + hi (‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
196Kaccāyana Sutta. 133Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Su-nam-aṃsu vā (409)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Su-naṃ-aṃsu + vā = 2 words]

Tassa sakhantassa āro hoti vā su naṃ aṃ icc etesu.

Sakhāresu, sakhesu; sakhārānaṃ, sakhīnaṃ; sakhāraṃ, sakhaṃ.

Optionally, when ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘aṃ’ follow.
Optionally, when [the inflections] ‘su’, ‘naṃ’ and ‘aṃ’ follow, the end [vowel] of “sakha” becomes ‘āra’.

  1. Sakhāresu = sakha + su (the end ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘āra’ (§196); ‘a’ of ‘āra’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
  2. Sakhesu = sakha + su (‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
  3. Sakhārānaṃ = sakha + naṃ (the end ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘āra’ (§196); ‘a’ of ‘āra’ is lengthened (§89)).
  4. Sakhīnaṃ = sakha + naṃ (the end ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘i’ (§194); ‘i’ is lengthened (§89)).
  5. Sakhāraṃ = sakha + aṃ (the end ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘āra’ (§196); ‘a’ of ‘āra’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Sakhaṃ = sakha + aṃ (‘a’ of “sakha” is elided (§83)).
197Kaccāyana Sutta. 125Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Brahmato tu smiṃ ni (405)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Brahmato + tu + smiṃ + ni = 4 words]

Tasmā brahmato smiṃvacanassa ni-ādeso hoti.

Brahmani.

Tuggahaṇena abrahmato pi smiṃvacanassa ni hoti. Kammani, cammani, muddhani.

After “brahma”, ‘smiṃ’ [is substituted by] ‘ni’.
After “brahma”, the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ni’.

  1. Brahmani = brahma + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§197)).

By taking “tu”, also after words other than “brahma”, the inflection ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘ni’.

  1. Kammani = kamma + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (“tu” in §197)).
  2. Cammani = camma + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (“tu” in §197)).
  3. Muddhani = muddha + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (“tu” in §197)).
198Kaccāyana Sutta. 123Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Uttaṃ sa-nāsu (410)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Uttaṃ + sa-nāsu = 2 words]

Tassa brahma saddassa anto uttam āpajjate sa nā icc etesu.

Brahmuno, brahmunā.

Sa-nāsv iti kimatthaṃ? Brahmā.44With respect to this, in the Sinhalese manuscript the reading is found “uttam iti bhāvaniddeso katthaci abhāvaṃ dasseti, brahmassa” (‘uttaṃ’ is an expression that indicates a state [and] shows that in some cases [the operation] does not take place [such as in] brahmassa).

When ‘sa’ and ‘nā’ follow, [there is] ‘u’.
When [the inflections] ‘sa’ and ‘nā’ follow, the end [vowel] of the word “brahma” becomes ‘u’.

  1. Brahmuno = brahma + sa (‘a’ of “brahma” becomes ‘u’ (§198); ‘u’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§117)).
  2. Brahmunā = brahma + nā (‘a’ of “brahma” becomes ‘u’ (§198)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘sa’ and ‘nā’ follow”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘sa’ or ‘nā’ do not follow, such as in:] brahmā.


44With respect to this, in the Sinhalese manuscript the reading is found “uttam iti bhāvaniddeso katthaci abhāvaṃ dasseti, brahmassa” (‘uttaṃ’ is an expression that indicates a state [and] shows that in some cases [the operation] does not take place [such as in] brahmassa).
199Kaccāyana Sutta. 158Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Satthu-pitādīnam ā sismiṃ silopo ca (411)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Satthu-pitu-ādīnaṃ + ā + sismiṃ + silopo + ca = 5 words]

Satthu-pitu-ādīnam anto āttam āpajjate sismiṃ, silopo ca hoti.

Satthā, pitā, mātā, bhātā, kattā.

Sismim iti kimatthaṃ? Satthussa, pitussa, mātussa, bhātussa, kattussa.

And when ‘si’ follows, [there is] ‘ā’ of “satthu”, “pitu”, etc., and the elision of ‘si’.
When [the inflection] ‘si’ follows, the end [vowel] of “satthu”, “pitu”, etc., becomes ‘ā’; and ‘si’ is elided.

  1. Satthā = satthu + si (‘u’ becomes ‘ā’ (§199); ‘si’ is elided (§199)).
  2. Pitā = pitu + si (‘u’ becomes ‘ā’ (§199); ‘si’ is elided (§199)).
  3. Mātā = mātu + si (‘u’ becomes ‘ā’ (§199); ‘si’ is elided (§199)).
  4. Bhātā = bhātu + si (‘u’ becomes ‘ā’ (§199); ‘si’ is elided (§199)).
  5. Kattā = kattu + si (‘u’ becomes ‘ā’ (§199); ‘si’ is elided (§199)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘si’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘si’ does not follow, such as in:] satthussa, pitussa, mātussa, bhātussa, kattussa.

200Kaccāyana Sutta. 159Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Aññesv ārattaṃ (412)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Aññesu + ārattaṃ = 2 words]

Satthu-pitu-ādīnam anto aññesu vacanesu ārattam āpajjate.

Satthāraṃ, pitaraṃ, mātaraṃ, bhātaraṃ, kattāraṃ, satthārehi, pitarehi, mātarehi, bhātarehi, kattārehi.

Aññesv iti kimatthaṃ? Satthā, pitā, mātā, bhātā, kattā.45With respect to this, in the Sinhalese manuscript the reading is found “ārattaggahaṇena katthaci aniyamaṃ dasseti, satthussa, pitussa, mātussa, bhātussā” (by taking ‘āratta’ it is shown that in some cases [the application] is not fixed [such as in] satthussa, pitussa, mātussa, bhātussā).

When others follow, [there is] ‘āra’.
When other inflections follow, the end [vowel] of “satthu”, “pitu”, etc., becomes ‘āra’.

  1. Satthāraṃ = satthu + aṃ (‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘a’ of ‘āra’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Pitaraṃ = pitu + aṃ (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘ā’ of ‘āra’ is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Mātaraṃ = mātu + aṃ (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘ā’ of ‘āra’ is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Bhātaraṃ = bhātu + aṃ (‘u’ of “bhātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘ā’ of ‘āra’ is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Kattāraṃ = kattu + aṃ (‘u’ of “kattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘a’ of ‘āra’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Satthārehi = satthu + hi (‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘a’ of ‘āra’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
  7. Pitarehi = pitu + hi (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘ā’ of ‘āra’ is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
  8. Mātarehi = mātu + hi (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘ā’ of ‘āra’ is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
  9. Bhātarehi = bhātu + hi (‘u’ of “bhātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘ā’ of ‘āra’ is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
  10. Kattārehi = kattu + hi (‘u’ of “kattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘a’ of ‘āra’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).

What is the purpose of saying “when other [inflections] follow”? [This sutta does not apply when other inflections do not follow, such as in:] satthā, pitā, mātā, bhātā, kattā.


45With respect to this, in the Sinhalese manuscript the reading is found “ārattaggahaṇena katthaci aniyamaṃ dasseti, satthussa, pitussa, mātussa, bhātussā” (by taking ‘āratta’ it is shown that in some cases [the application] is not fixed [such as in] satthussa, pitussa, mātussa, bhātussā).
201Kaccāyana Sutta. 163Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Vā naṃmhi (416)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Vā + naṃmhi = 2 words]

Satthu-pitu-ādīnam anto ārattam āpajjate vā naṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Satthārānaṃ, pitarānaṃ, mātarānaṃ, bhātarānaṃ.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Satthānaṃ, pitūnaṃ, mātūnaṃ, bhātūnaṃ.

Optionally, when ‘naṃ’ follows.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘naṃ’ follows, the end [vowel] of “satthu”, “pitu”, etc., becomes ‘āra’.

  1. Satthārānaṃ = satthu + naṃ (‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘āra’ (§201); ‘a’ of ‘āra’ is lengthened (§89)).
  2. Pitarānaṃ = pitu + naṃ (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§201); ‘ā’ of ‘āra’ is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is lengthened (§89)).
  3. Mātarānaṃ = mātu + naṃ (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§201); ‘ā’ of ‘āra’ is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is lengthened (§89)).
  4. Bhātarānaṃ = bhātu + naṃ (‘u’ of “bhātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§201); ‘ā’ of ‘āra’ is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is lengthened (§89)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [To allow exceptions to this sutta, such as in:] satthānaṃ, pitūnaṃ, mātūnaṃ, bhātūnaṃ.

202Kaccāyana Sutta. 164Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Satthun’ attañ ca (417)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Satthunaṃ + attaṃ + ca = 3 words]

Tassa satthusaddassa anto attam āpajjate vā naṃmhi vibhattimhi.

Satthānaṃ, pitānaṃ, mātānaṃ, bhātānaṃ, kattānaṃ.

Vā ti kimatthaṃ? Satthārānaṃ, pitarānaṃ, mātarānaṃ, bhātarānaṃ, dhītarānaṃ.

Caggahaṇam aññesam pi saṅgahaṇatthaṃ.

And ‘a’ of “satthu”.
Optionally, when the inflection ‘naṃ’ follows, the end [vowel] of the word “satthu” becomes ‘a’.

  1. Satthānaṃ = satthu + naṃ (‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘a’ (§202); ‘a’ is lengthened (§89)).
  2. Pitānaṃ = pitu + naṃ (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘a’ (“ca” of §202); ‘a’ is lengthened (§89)).
  3. Mātānaṃ = mātu + naṃ (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘a’ (“ca” of §202); ‘a’ is lengthened (§89)).
  4. Bhātānaṃ = bhātu + naṃ (‘u’ of “bhātu” becomes ‘a’ (“ca” of §202); ‘a’ is lengthened (§89)).
  5. Kattānaṃ = kattu + naṃ (‘u’ of “kattu” becomes ‘a’ (“ca” of §202); ‘a’ is lengthened (§89)).

What is the purpose of saying “optionally”? [To allow exceptions to this sutta, such as in:] satthārānaṃ, pitarānaṃ, mātarānaṃ, bhātarānaṃ, dhītarānaṃ.

The taking of “ca” is for including the others too.

203Kaccāyana Sutta. 162Rūpasiddhi Sutta.U sasmiṃ salopo ca (418)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[U + sasmiṃ + salopo + ca = 4 words]

Satthu pitu icc evamādīnam antassa uttaṃ hoti vā sasmiṃ salopo ca.

Satthu, satthussa, satthuno dīyate, pariggaho vā. Pitu, pitussa, pituno dīyate, pariggaho vā. Bhātu, bhātussa, bhātuno dīyate, pariggaho vā. Caggahaṇaṃ dutiyasampiṇḍanatthaṃ.

When ‘sa’ follows, [there is] ‘u’ and the elision of ‘sa’.
Optionally, when [the inflection] ‘sa’ follows, the end [vowel] of “satthu”, “pitu”, etc., becomes ‘u’ and ‘sa’ is elided.

  1. Satthu, satthussa, satthuno dīyate, pariggaho vā (it is given to the teacher, or [it is] the possession of the teacher):
    • Satthu = satthu + sa (‘u’ of “satthu” is substituted by ‘u’ (§203); ‘sa’ is elided (§203)).
    • Satthussa = satthu + sa (‘u’ of “satthu” is substituted by ‘u’ (§203); ‘s’ is inserted (§61)).
    • Satthuno = satthu + sa (‘u’ of “satthu” is substituted by ‘u’ (§203); ‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§117)).
  1. Pitu, pitussa, pituno dīyate, pariggaho vā (it is given to the father, or [it is] the possession of the father):
    • Pitu = pitu + sa (‘u’ of “pitu” is substituted by ‘u’ (§203); ‘sa’ is elided (§203)).
    • Pitussa = pitu + sa (‘u’ of “pitu” is substituted by ‘u’ (§203); ‘s’ is inserted (§61)).
    • Pituno = pitu + sa (‘u’ of “pitu” is substituted by ‘u’ (§203); ‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§117)).
  1. Bhātu, bhātussa, bhātuno dīyate, pariggaho vā (it is given to the brother, or [it is] the possession of the brother):
    • Bhātu = bhātu + sa (‘u’ of “bhātu” is substituted by ‘u’ (§203); ‘sa’ is elided (§203)).
    • Bhātussa = bhātu + sa (‘u’ of “bhātu” is substituted by ‘u’ (§203); ‘s’ is inserted (§61)).
    • Bhātuno = bhātu + sa (‘u’ of “bhātu” is substituted by ‘u’ (§203); ‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§117)).

The taking of “ca” is for the inclusion of the second [meaning].

204Kaccāyana Sutta. 167Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sakkamandhātādīnañ ca (419)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sakkamandhātu-ādīnaṃ + ca = 2 words]

Sakkamandhātu icc evamādīnam anto uttam āpajjate sasmiṃ, salopo ca hoti.

Sakkamandhātu iva assa rājino vibhavo. Evaṃ kattu, gantu, dātu icc evamādī.

Pun’ ārambhaggahaṇam kimatthaṃ? Niccadīpanatthaṃ. Sakkamandhātu.

Caggahaṇaṃ dutiyasampiṇḍanatthaṃ.

And of “sakkamandhātu”, etc.
When [the inflection] ‘sa’ follows, the end [vowel] of “sakkamandhātu”, etc., becomes ‘u’; and ‘sa’ is elided.

  1. Sakkamandhātu iva assa rājino vibhavo (the wealth of that king is like that [of king] Sakkamandhātu):
    • Sakkamandhātu = sakkamandhātu + sa (‘u’ of “sakkamandhātu” becomes ‘u’ (§204); ‘sa’ is elided (§204)).
  1. Evaṃ kattu, gantu, dātu icc evamādī (thus also kattu, gantu, dātu, etc.):
    • Kattu = kattu + sa (‘u’ of “kattu” becomes ‘u’ (§204); ‘sa’ is elided (§204)).
    • Gantu = gantu + sa (‘u’ of “gantu” becomes ‘u’ (§204); ‘sa’ is elided (§204)).
    • Dātu = dātu + sa (‘u’ of “dātu” becomes ‘u’ (§204); ‘sa’ is elided (§204)).

What is the purpose of the repetition of this sutta? To fix the change of ‘u’ into ‘u’.46There is only one example of “sakkamandhātu” with ‘sa’. Sakkamandhātu.

The taking of “ca” is for the inclusion of the second [meaning].


46There is only one example of “sakkamandhātu” with ‘sa’.
205Kaccāyana Sutta. 160Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tato yonam o tu (421)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tato + yonaṃ + o + tu = 4 words]

Tato ārādesato sabbesaṃ yonaṃ okārādeso hoti.

Satthāro, pitaro, mātaro, bhātaro, kattāro, vattāro.

Tuggahaṇena aññasmā pi yonaṃ okāro hoti. Caturo janā (Khu. i, 336)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 336, gāvo, ubho, purisā.

After [the substitution ‘āra’], there is ‘o’ of ‘yo’.
After the substitution ‘āra’, all the [inflections] ‘yo’ are substituted by ‘o’.

  1. Satthāro = satthu + yo (‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Pitaro = pitu + yo (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Mātaro = mātu + yo (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Bhātaro = bhātu + yo (‘u’ of “bhātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Kattāro = kattu + yo (‘u’ of “kattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Vattāro = vattu + yo (‘u’ of “vattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

By taking “tu”, also after other words ‘yo’ becomes ‘o’. Caturo janā, gāvo, ubho, purisā.47Ubho purisā, najjo (Sī).


47Ubho purisā, najjo (Sī).
206Kaccāyana Sutta. 165Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tato smim i (422)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tato + smiṃ + i = 3 words]

Tato ārādesato smiṃvacanassa ikārādeso hoti.

Satthari, pitari, mātari, dhītari, bhātari, kattari, vattari.

Puna tatogahaṇena aññasmā pi smiṃvacanassa ikāro hoti. Bhuvi.

After that, ‘smiṃ’ [becomes] ‘i’.
After the substitution ‘āra’, the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’.

  1. Satthari = satthu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Pitari = pitu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Mātari = mātu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Dhītari = dhītu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “dhītu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Bhātari = bhātu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “bhātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Kattari = kattu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “kattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  7. Vattari = vattu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “vattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

By taking “tato” again, also after other words the inflection ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘i’. Bhuvi.

207Kaccāyana Sutta. 161Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Nā ā (423)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Nā + ā = 2 words]

Tato ārādesato nāvacanassa ā-ādeso hoti.

Satthārā, pitarā, mātarā, bhātarā, dhītarā, kattārā, vattārā.

‘Nā’ [becomes] ‘ā’.
After the substitution ‘āra’, the inflection ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’.

  1. Satthārā = satthu + nā (‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Pitarā = pitu + nā (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Mātarā = mātu + nā (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Bhātarā = bhātu + nā (‘u’ of “bhātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Dhītarā = dhītu + nā (‘u’ of “dhītu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Kattārā = kattu + nā (‘u’ of “kattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  7. Vattārā = vattu + nā (‘u’ of “vattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
208Kaccāyana Sutta. 166Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Āro rassam ikāre (424)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Āro + rassaṃ + ikāre = 3 words]

Ārādeso rassam āpajjate ikāre pare.

Satthari, pitari, mātari, dhītari, kattari, vattari.

When ‘i’ follows, ‘āra’ [becomes] short.
When ‘i’ follows, the substitution ‘āra’ is shortened.

  1. Satthari = satthu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Pitari = pitu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Mātari = mātu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Dhītari = dhītu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “dhītu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Kattari = kattu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “kattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Vattari = vattu + smiṃ (‘u’ of “vattu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘i’ (§206); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§208); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
209Kaccāyana Sutta. 168Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Pitādīnam asimhi (425)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Pitu-ādīnaṃ + asimhi = 2 words]

Pitādīnam ārādeso rassam āpajjate asimhi vibhattimhi.

Pitarā, mātarā, bhātarā, dhītarā, pitaro, mātaro, bhātaro, dhītaro.

Asimhiggahaṇam tomhi pare ikārādesañāpanatthaṃ. Mātito (D. i, 106)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. i, p. 106, pitito (D. i, 106)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. i, p. 106, bhātito, duhitito.

When [an inflection] other than ‘si’ follows, of “pitu”, etc.
When an inflection other than ‘si’ follows, the substitution ‘āra’ of “pitu”, etc., is shortened.

  1. Pitarā = pitu + nā (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Mātarā = mātu + nā (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Bhātarā = bhātu + nā (‘u’ of “bhātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Dhītarā = dhītu + nā (‘u’ of “dhītu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Pitaro = pitu + yo (‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Mātaro = mātu + yo (‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  7. Bhātaro = bhātu + yo (‘u’ of “bhātu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  8. Dhītaro = dhītu + yo (‘u’ of “dhītu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§205); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

The taking of “asimhi” is for showing the substitution ‘i’ when ‘to’ follows.

  1. Mātito = mātu + to (‘u’ of “mātu” is substituted by ‘i’ (“asimhi” in §209)).
  2. Pitito = pitu + to (‘u’ of “pitu” is substituted by ‘i’ (“asimhi” in §209)).
  3. Bhātito = bhātu + to (‘u’ of “bhātu” is substituted by ‘i’ (“asimhi” in §209)).
  4. Duhitito = duhitu + to (‘u’ of “duhitu” is substituted by ‘i’ (“asimhi” in §209)).
210Kaccāyana Sutta. 239Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tayā-tayīnaṃ takāro tvattaṃ vā (435)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tayā-tayīnaṃ + takāro + tvattaṃ + vā = 4 words]

Tayā tayi icc etesaṃ takāro tvattam āpajjate vā.

Tvayā, tayā; tvayi, tayi.

Etesam iti kimatthaṃ? Tuvaṃ, tavaṃ.

Optionally, the letter ‘ta’ of “tayā” and “tayi” [becomes] ‘tva’.
Optionally, the letter ‘ta’ of [the substitutions] “tayā” and “tayi” becomes ‘tva’.

  1. Tvayā = tumha + nā (“tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tayā” (§145); ‘ta’ becomes ‘tva’ (§210)).
  2. Tayā = tumha + nā (“tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tayā” (§145)).
  3. Tvayi = tumha + smiṃ (“tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tayi” (§139); ‘ta’ becomes ‘tva’ (§210)).
  4. Tayi = tumha + smiṃ (“tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tayi” (§139)).

What is the purpose of saying “of these [substitutions]”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “tayā” or “tayi”, such as in:] tuvaṃ, tavaṃ.

Iti nāma-kappe tatiyo kaṇḍo
Thus ends the third section of the noun chapter
Catuttha-Kaṇḍa· Fourth section
211Kaccāyana Sutta. 126Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Attanto hismim anattaṃ (439)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Atta-anto + hismiṃ + anattaṃ = 3 words]

Tassa attano anto anattam āpajjate himhi vibhattimhi.

Attanehi, attanebhi.

Attanto ti kimatthaṃ? Rājehi, rājebhi.

Hismin iti kimatthaṃ? Attano.

Anattam iti bhāvaniddesena attasaddassa sakādeso hoti sabbāsu vibhattīsu. Sako, sakā, sakaṃ, sake.

When ‘hi’ follows, [there is] ‘ana’ of the end of “atta”.
When the inflection ‘hi’ follows, the end [vowel] of “atta” becomes ‘ana’.

  1. Attanehi = atta + hi (‘a’ of “atta” becomes ‘ana’ (§211); ‘a’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101)).
  2. Attanebhi = atta + hi (‘a’ of “atta” becomes ‘ana’ (§211); ‘a’ is substituted by ‘e’ (§101); ‘hi’ is substituted by ‘bhi’ (§99)).

What is the purpose of saying “the end of ‘atta’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “atta”, such as in:] rājehi, rājebhi.

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘hi’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘hi’ does not follow, such as in:] attano.48Attanā (Sī).

By the expression that indicates a state, “anattaṃ”, the word “atta” is substituted by “saka” when all the inflections follow. Sako, sakā, sakaṃ, sake.49Sakārādeso (K).


48Attanā (Sī).
49Sakārādeso (K).
212Kaccāyana Sutta. 129Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tato smiṃ ni (405)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tato + smiṃ + ni = 3 words]

Tato attato smiṃvacanassa ni hoti. Attani.

After this, ‘smiṃ’ [becomes] ‘ni’.
After “atta”, the inflection ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘ni’.

  1. Attani = atta + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§212)).
213Kaccāyana Sutta. 127Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sassa no (440)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sassa + no = 2 words]

Tato attato sassa vibhattissa no hoti. Attano.

‘No’ of ‘sa’.
After “atta”, the inflection ‘sa’ becomes ‘no’.

  1. Attano = atta + sa (‘sa’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§213)).
214Kaccāyana Sutta. 128Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Smā nā (441)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Smā + nā = 2 words]

Tato attato smāvacanassa nā hoti.

Attanā.

Puna tatogahaṇena tassa attano takārass’ eva rakāro hoti sabbesu vacanesu. Atrajo, atrajaṃ.

‘Smā’ [becomes] ‘nā’.
After “atta”, the inflection ‘smā’ becomes ‘nā’.

  1. Attanā = atta + smā (‘smā’ is substituted by ‘nā’ (§214)).

By taking “tato” again, ‘ta’ of “atta” becomes ‘ra’ when all the inflections follow.

  1. Atrajo = atta + jo (‘ta’ of “atta” is substituted by ‘ra’ (“tato” in §214)).
  2. Atrajaṃ = atta + jaṃ (‘ta’ of “atta” is substituted by ‘ra’ (“tato” in §214)).
215Kaccāyana Sutta. 141Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Jha-lato ca (442)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta50Caggahaṇaṃ kvaci nivattanatthaṃ (Rū.), caggahaṇaṃ tadanukaḍḍhanatthaṃ (Nyā.) (The taking of “ca” is for excluding “kvaci” (Rū.); the taking of “ca” is for the dragging of that (Nyā.)).
[Jha-lato + ca = 2 words]

Jha la icc etehi smāvacanassa nā hoti.

Agginā, daṇḍinā, bhikkhunā, sayambhunā.

Smā ti kimatthaṃ? Aggayo, munayo, isayo.

And after ‘jha’ and ‘la’.
After ‘jha’ and ‘la’, the inflection ‘smā’ becomes ‘nā’.

  1. Agginā = aggi + smā (‘i’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘nā’ (§215)).
  2. Daṇḍinā = daṇḍī + smā (‘ī’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened (§84); ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘nā’ (§215)).
  3. Bhikkhunā = bhikkhu + smā (‘u’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘nā’ (§215)).
  4. Sayambhunā = sayambhū + smā (‘ū’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘ū’ is shortened (§84); ‘smā’ is substituted by ‘nā’ (§215)).

What is the purpose of saying ‘smā’? [This sutta does not apply when ‘smā’ does not follow, such as in:] aggayo, munayo, isayo.


50Caggahaṇaṃ kvaci nivattanatthaṃ (Rū.), caggahaṇaṃ tadanukaḍḍhanatthaṃ (Nyā.) (The taking of “ca” is for excluding “kvaci” (Rū.); the taking of “ca” is for the dragging of that (Nyā.)).
216Kaccāyana Sutta. 180Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Gha-pato smiṃ yaṃ vā (443)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Gha-pato + smiṃ + yaṃ + vā = 4 words]

Tasmā gha-pato smiṃvacanassa yaṃ hoti vā.

Kaññāyaṃ, kaññāya; rattiyaṃ, rattiyā; itthiyaṃ, itthiyā; yāguyaṃ, yāguyā; vadhuyaṃ, vadhuyā.

Optionally, after ‘gha’ and ‘pa’, ‘smiṃ’ [becomes] ‘yaṃ’.
Optionally, after ‘gha’ and ‘pa’, the inflection ‘smiṃ’ becomes ‘yaṃ’.

  1. Kaññāyaṃ = kaññā + smiṃ (‘ā’ is named ‘gha’ (§60); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘yaṃ’ (§216)).
  2. Kaññāya = kaññā + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘āya’ (§111); ‘ā’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Rattiyaṃ = ratti + smiṃ (‘i’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘yaṃ’ (§216)).
  4. Rattiyā = ratti + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘yā’ (§112)).
  5. Itthiyaṃ = itthī + smiṃ (‘ī’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘ī’ is shortened (§84); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘yaṃ’ (§216)).
  6. Itthiyā = itthī + smiṃ (‘ī’ is shortened (§84); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘yā’ (§112)).
  7. Yāguyaṃ = yāgu + smiṃ (‘u’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘yaṃ’ (§216)).
  8. Yāguyā = yāgu + smiṃ (‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘yā’ (§112)).
  9. Vadhuyaṃ = vadhū + smiṃ (‘ū’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘ū’ is shortened (§84); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘yaṃ’ (§216)).
  10. Vadhuyā = vadhū + smiṃ (‘ū’ is shortened (§84); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘yā’ (§112)).
217Kaccāyana Sutta. 199Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yonaṃ ni napuṃsakehi (444)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yonaṃ + ni + napuṃsakehi = 3 words]

Sabbesaṃ yonaṃ ni hoti vā napuṃsakehi liṅgehi.

Aṭṭhīni, aṭṭhī; āyūni, āyū. Napuṃsakehī ti kimatthaṃ? Itthiyo.

After the neuter bases, [there is] ‘ni’ of ‘yo’.
Optionally, after the neuter bases, all the ‘yo’ become ‘ni’.

  1. Aṭṭhīni = aṭṭhi + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§217); ‘i’ is lengthened (§88)).
  2. Aṭṭhī = aṭṭhi + yo (‘yo’ is elided (§118); ‘i’ is lengthened (§88)).
  3. Āyūni = āyu + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§217); ‘u’ is lengthened (§88)).
  4. Āyū = āyu + yo (‘yo’ is elided (§118); ‘u’ is lengthened (§88)).

What is the purpose of saying “after the neuter [bases]”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no neuter bases, such as in:] itthiyo.

218Kaccāyana Sutta. 196Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ato niccaṃ (445)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ato + niccaṃ = 2 words]

Akārantehi napuṃsakaliṅgehi yonaṃ ni hoti niccaṃ.

Yāni, yāni; tāni, tāni; kāni, kāni; bhayāni, bhayāni; rūpāni, rūpāni.

Always after ‘a’.
After the neuter bases ending in ‘a’, ‘yo’ always becomes ‘ni’.

  1. Yāni = ya + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§218); ‘a’ is lengthened (§88)).
  2. Tāni = ta + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§218); ‘a’ is lengthened (§88)).
  3. Kāni = ka + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§218); ‘a’ is lengthened (§88)).
  4. Bhayāni = bhaya + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§218); ‘a’ is lengthened (§88)).
  5. Rūpāni = rūpa + yo (‘yo’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§218); ‘a’ is lengthened (§88)).
219Kaccāyana Sutta. 195Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Si ’ṃ (446)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Si + aṃ = 2 words]

Akārantehi napuṃsakaliṅgehi sivacanassa aṃ hoti niccaṃ.

Sabbaṃ, yaṃ, taṃ, kaṃ, rūpaṃ.

‘Si’ [becomes] ‘aṃ’.
After the neuter bases ending in ‘a’, the inflection ‘si’ always becomes ‘aṃ’.

  1. Sabbaṃ = sabba + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§219); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Yaṃ = ya + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§219); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Taṃ = ta + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§219); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Kaṃ = ka + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§219); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Rūpaṃ = rūpa + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§219); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
220Kaccāyana Sutta. 74Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sesato lopaṃ ga si pi (447)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sesato + lopaṃ + gasi + api = 4 words]

Tato niddiṭṭhehi liṅgehi sesato ga si icc ete lopam āpajjante.

Bhoti itthi, sā itthī. Bho daṇḍi, so daṇḍī. Bho sattha, so satthā. Bho rāja, so rājā.

Sesato ti kimatthaṃ? Puriso gacchati.

Ga-sī ti kimatthaṃ? Itthiyā; satthussa.

After the remaining ones, ‘ga’ and ‘si’ are also elided.
After the remaining bases that have been shown,51Those shown by the suttas “Si ’ṃ” (§219 · Si ’ṃ — ‘Si’ [becomes] ‘aṃ’.">§219), “S’ o” (§104 · S’ o — ‘Si’ [becomes] ‘o’.">§104), “Sy ā ca” (§189 · Sy ā ca — And ‘si’ [becomes] ‘ā’.">§189), “Sakhato gass’ e vā” (§113 · Sakhato gass’ e vā — Optionally, ‘e’ of ‘ga’ after “sakha”.">§113) and “Ghat’ e ca” (§114 · Ghat’ e ca — And ‘e’ after ‘gha’.">§114) are called here “sesa” [remaining]. ‘ga’ and ‘si’ are elided.

  1. Itthi = itthī + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ī’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘ī’ is shortened (§245); ‘ga’ is elided (§220)).
  2. Itthī = itthī + si (‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  3. Daṇḍi = daṇḍī + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ī’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened (§245); ‘ga’ is elided (§220)).
  4. Daṇḍī = daṇḍī + si (‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  5. Sattha = satthu + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘ā’ is shortened (§246); ‘ga’ is elided (§220)).
  6. Satthā = satthu + si (‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘ā’ (§199); ‘si’ is elided (§199)).
  7. Rāja = rāja + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘ā’ is shortened (§246); ‘ga’ is elided (§220)).
  8. Rājā = rāja + si (‘si’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§189); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

What is the purpose of saying “after the remaining ones”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no remaining bases, such as in:] Puriso gacchati.

What is the purpose of saying “‘ga’ and ‘si’”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘ga’ or ‘si’ do not follow, such as in:] itthiyā; satthussa.


51Those shown by the suttas “Si ’ṃ” (§219), “S’ o” (§104), “Sy ā ca” (§189), “Sakhato gass’ e vā” (§113) and “Ghat’ e ca” (§114) are called here “sesa” [remaining].
221Kaccāyana Sutta. 282Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbāsam āvuso-’pasagga-nipātādīhi ca (448)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbāsaṃ + āvuso-upasagga-nipāta-ādīhi + ca = 3 words]

Sabbāsaṃ vibhattīnaṃ ekavacanabahuvacanānaṃ paṭhamā-dutiyā-tatiyā-catutthī-pañcamī-chaṭṭhī-sattamīnaṃ lopo hoti āvuso upasagga nipāta icc evamādīhi ca.

Tvaṃ pan’ āvuso (Vin. ii, 1)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 1; tumhe pan’ āvuso (Vin. ii, 161)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 161; padaso dhammaṃ vāceyya (Vin. ii, 25)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 25; vihāraṃ sve upagaccheyya. Pa, parā, ni, nī, u, du, saṃ, vi, ava, anu, pari, adhi, abhi, pati, su, ā, ati, api, apa, upa. Pahāro, parābhavo, nihāro, nīhāro, uhāro, duhāro, saṃhāro, vihāro, avahāro, anuhāro, parihāro, adhihāro, abhihāro, patihāro, suhāro, āhāro, atihāro, apihāro, apahāro, upahāro. Evaṃ vīsati upasaggehi ca, yathā, tathā, evaṃ, khalu, kho, tatra, atho, atha, hi, tu, ca, vā, vo, haṃ, ahaṃ, alaṃ, eva, ho, aho, he, ahe, re, are. Evamādīhi nipātehi ca yojetabbāni.

Caggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ.

And after “āvuso”, the prefixes, the particles, etc., [there is elision] of all.
After “āvuso”, the prefixes, the particles, etc., all the inflections, singular and plural, are elided, namely: first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh.

  1. Tvaṃ pan’ āvuso (and you, friend?)
  2. Tumhe pan’ āvuso (and you, friends?)
  3. Padaso dhammaṃ vāceyya (he should have the Dhamma recited word by word)
  4. Vihāraṃ sve upagaccheyya (he should approach the monastery tomorrow).
  5. Āvuso = āvuso + si (‘si’ is elided (§221)).52Note: This rule is to be employed after the twenty prefixes, ‘pa’, etc., and the particles, ‘yathā’, etc.

The twenty prefixes are the following: pa, parā, ni, nī, u, du, saṃ, vi, ava, anu, pari, adhi, abhi, pati, su, ā, ati, api, apa, upa. [Examples:] Pahāro, parābhavo, nihāro, nīhāro, uhāro, duhāro, saṃhāro, vihāro, avahāro, anuhāro, parihāro, adhihāro, abhihāro, patihāro, suhāro, āhāro, atihāro, apihāro, apahāro, upahāro.

Thus with the twenty prefixes; and they should be employed [likewise] with the particles yathā, tathā, evaṃ, khalu, kho, tatra, atho, atha, hi, tu, ca, vā, vo, haṃ, ahaṃ, alaṃ, eva, ho, aho, he, ahe, re, are, etc.

The taking of “ca” is for restricting [the scope of this sutta].


52Note: This rule is to be employed after the twenty prefixes, ‘pa’, etc., and the particles, ‘yathā’, etc.
222Kaccāyana Sutta. 342Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Pumassa liṅgādīsu samāsesu (449)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Pumassa + liṅga-ādīsu + samāsesu = 3 words]

Puma icc etassa anto lopam āpajjate liṅgādīsu parapadesu samāsesu.

Pulliṅgaṃ, pumbhāvo, puṅkokilo.

Pumasse ti kimatthaṃ? Itthiliṅgaṃ, napuṃsakaliṅgaṃ.

Liṅgādīsv iti kimatthaṃ? Pumitthī.

Samāsesu ti kimatthaṃ? Pumassa liṅgaṃ.

In the compounds of “puma”, when [the word] “liṅga”, etc.
In the compounds, when [the words] “liṅga”, etc., are the following member,53Parapadesu pi. the end [vowel] of “puma” is elided.

  1. Pulliṅgaṃ = puma + liṅgaṃ (‘a’ of “puma” is elided (§222); ‘m’ is substituted by ‘ṃ’ (§82); ‘ṃ’ is substituted by ‘l’ (“vā” in §31)).
  2. Pumbhāvo = puma + bhāvo (‘a’ of “puma” is elided (§222); ‘m’ is substituted by ‘ṃ’ (§82); ‘ṃ’ is substituted by ‘m’ (§31)).
  3. Puṅkokilo = puma + kokilo (‘a’ of “puma” is elided (§222); ‘m’ is substituted by ‘ṃ’ (§82); ‘ṃ’ is substituted by ‘ṅ’ (§31)).

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘puma’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no “puma”, such as in:] itthiliṅgaṃ, napuṃsakaliṅgaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘liṅga’, etc., [are the following member]”? [This sutta does not apply when “liṅga”, etc., are not the following member, such as in:] Pumitthī.

What is the purpose of saying “in the compounds”? [This sutta does not apply when there are no compounds, such as in:] Pumassa liṅgaṃ.


53Parapadesu pi.
223Kaccāyana Sutta. 188Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Aṃ yam īto pasaññato (450)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Aṃ + yaṃ + īto + pasaññato = 4 words]

Aṃvacanassa yaṃ hoti vā īto pasaññato. Itthiyaṃ, itthiṃ.

Pasaññato ti kimatthaṃ? Daṇḍinaṃ, bhoginaṃ.

Am iti kimatthaṃ? Itthīhi.

After ‘ī’ named ‘pa’, ‘aṃ’ [becomes] ‘yaṃ’.
Optionally, after ‘ī’ named ‘pa’, ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘yaṃ’.

  1. Itthiyaṃ = itthī + aṃ (‘ī’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘aṃ’ is substituted by ‘yaṃ’ (§223); ‘ī’ is shortened (§84)).
  2. Itthiṃ = itthī + aṃ (‘ī’ of “itthī” is shortened (§84); ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘ṃ’ (§82)).

What is the purpose of saying “named ‘pa’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘pa’, such as in:] daṇḍinaṃ, bhoginaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying ‘aṃ’? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘aṃ’, such as in:] itthīhi.

224Kaccāyana Sutta. 153Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Naṃ jhato katarassā (451)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Naṃ + jhato + katarassā = 3 words]

Tasmā jhato katarassā aṃvacanassa naṃ hoti.

Daṇḍinaṃ, bhoginaṃ.

Jhato ti kimatthaṃ? Vessabhuṃ.

Katarassā ti kimatthaṃ? Kucchiṃ.

After ‘jha’ that has been shortened, [there is] ‘naṃ’.
After ‘jha’ that has been shortened, the inflection ‘aṃ’ becomes ‘naṃ’.

  1. Daṇḍinaṃ = daṇḍī + aṃ (‘ī’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened (§84); ‘aṃ’ is substituted by ‘naṃ’ (§224)).
  2. Bhoginaṃ = bhogī + aṃ (‘ī’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened (§84); ‘aṃ’ is substituted by ‘naṃ’ (§224)).

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘jha’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘jha’, such as in:] Vessabhuṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “that has been shortened”? [This sutta does not apply when it has not been shortened, such as in:] Kucchiṃ.

225Kaccāyana Sutta. 151Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yonaṃ no (452)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yonaṃ + no = 2 words]

Sabbesaṃ yonaṃ jhato katarassā no hoti.

Daṇḍino bhogino; he daṇḍino, he bhogino.

Katarassā ti kimatthaṃ? Aggayo, munayo, isayo.

Jhato ti kimatthaṃ? Sayambhuno.

Yonan ti kimatthaṃ? Daṇḍinā, bhoginā.

‘No’ of ‘yo’.
After ‘jha’ that has been shortened, all the ‘yo’ become ‘no’.

  1. Daṇḍino = daṇḍī + yo (‘ī’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened (§84); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§225)).
  2. Bhogino = bhogī + yo (‘ī’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened (§84); ‘yo’ is substituted by ‘no’ (§225)).
  3. He daṇḍino, he bhogino: [vocatives, with the same sequence].

What is the purpose of saying “that has been shortened”? [This sutta does not apply when it has not been shortened, such as in:] aggayo, munayo, isayo.

What is the purpose of saying “after ‘jha’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘jha’, such as in:] Sayambhuno.

What is the purpose of saying “of ‘yo’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘yo’, such as in:] daṇḍinā, bhoginā.

226Kaccāyana Sutta. 154Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Smiṃ ni (406)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Smiṃ + ni = 2 words]

Tasmā jhato katarassā smiṃvacanassa ni-ādeso hoti.

Daṇḍini, bhogini.

Katarassā ti kimatthaṃ? Byādhimhi.

‘Smiṃ’ [becomes] ‘ni’.
After ‘jha’ that has been shortened, the inflection ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ni’.

  1. Daṇḍini = daṇḍī + smiṃ (‘ī’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened (§84); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§226)).
  2. Bhogini = bhogī + smiṃ (‘ī’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened (§84); ‘smiṃ’ is substituted by ‘ni’ (§226)).

What is the purpose of saying “that has been shortened”? [This sutta does not apply when it has not been shortened, such as in:] Byādhimhi.

227Kaccāyana Sutta. 270Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Kissa ka ve ca (456)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Kissa + ka + ve + ca = 4 words]

Kim icc etassa ko ca hoti vapaccaye pare.

Kva gato ’si tvaṃ Devānaṃpiyatissa.

Caggahaṇena avapaccaye pare pi ko ca hoti. Ko taṃ ninditum arahati (Khu. i, 47)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 47; kathaṃ bodhayituṃ dhammaṃ.54Bodhesi tvaṃ (Sī).

Ve ti kimatthaṃ? Kuto āgato ’si tvaṃ.

And when ‘va’ follows, [there is] ‘ka’ of “kiṃ”.
And when the suffix ‘va’ follows, “kiṃ” becomes “ka”.

  1. Kva gato ’si tvaṃ Devānaṃpiyatissa (where have you gone, Devānaṃpiyatissa?):
    • Kva = kiṃ + va (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ka” (§227); ‘a’ is elided (§404)).

By taking “ca”, also when other suffixes which are not ‘va’ follow, there is “ka”.

  1. Ko taṃ ninditum arahati (who deserves to blame him?); kathaṃ bodhayituṃ dhammaṃ (how to make the Dhamma known?):
    • Ko = kiṃ + si (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ka” (“ca” of §227); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104)).
    • Kathaṃ = kiṃ + thaṃ (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ka” (“ca” of §227)).

What is the purpose of saying ‘va’? [This sutta does not apply when ‘va’ does not follow, such as in:] Kuto āgato ’si tvaṃ (where have you come from?).


54Bodhesi tvaṃ (Sī).
228Kaccāyana Sutta. 272Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ku hiṃ-haṃsu ca (460)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ku + hiṃ-haṃsu + ca = 3 words]

Kim icc etassa ku hoti hiṃ haṃ icc etesu ca.

Kuhiṃ gacchasi, kuhaṃ gacchasi.

Caggahaṇena hiñcanaṃ-dācanaṃpaccayesu paresu aññatthāpi ku hoti. Kuhiñcanaṃ, kudācanaṃ.

And, when ‘hiṃ’ and ‘haṃ’ follow, [there is] “ku”.
And when ‘hiṃ’ and ‘haṃ’ follow, “kiṃ” becomes “ku”.

  1. Kuhiṃ gacchasi, kuhaṃ gacchasi (where are you going?):
    • Kuhiṃ = kiṃ + hiṃ (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (§228)).
    • Kuhaṃ = kiṃ + haṃ (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (§228)).

By taking “ca”, when the suffixes ‘hiñcanaṃ’ and ‘dācanaṃ’ follow, there is “ku” in other places too.

  1. Kuhiñcanaṃ = kiṃ + hiñcanaṃ (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (“ca” of §228)).
  2. Kudācanaṃ = kiṃ + dācanaṃ (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (“ca” of §228)).
229Kaccāyana Sutta. 226Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sesesu ca (457)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sesesu + ca = 2 words]

Kim icc etassa ko hoti sesesu vibhattipaccayesu paresu.

Ko pakāro, kathaṃ, kaṃ pakāraṃ, kathaṃ.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And when the remaining ones follow.
When the remaining inflections and suffixes follow, “kiṃ” becomes “ka”.

  1. Ko pakāro (what manner?), kathaṃ (how); kaṃ pakāraṃ (what manner), kathaṃ (how):
    • Ko = kiṃ + si (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ka” (§229); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104)).
    • Kaṃ = kiṃ + aṃ (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ka” (§229); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
    • Kathaṃ = kiṃ + thaṃ (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ka” (§229)).

The taking of “ca” is for dragging.55It is for the dragging of “ka”.


55It is for the dragging of “ka”.
230Kaccāyana Sutta. 262Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tra-to-thesu ca (460)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tra-to-thesu + ca = 2 words]

Kim icc etassa ku hoti tra to tha icc etesu ca.

Kutra, kuto, kuttha.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And when ‘tra’, ‘to’ and ‘tha’ follow.
When ‘tra’, ‘to’ and ‘tha’ follow, “kiṃ” becomes “ku”.

  1. Kutra = kiṃ + tra (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (§230)).
  2. Kuto = kiṃ + to (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (§230)).
  3. Kuttha = kiṃ + tha (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (§230); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).

The taking of “ca” is for dragging.56It is for the dragging of “kissa” and “ku”.


56It is for the dragging of “kissa” and “ku”.
231Kaccāyana Sutta. 263Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbass’ etassākāro vā (461)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbassa + etassa + akāro + vā = 4 words]

Sabbassa etasaddassa akāro hoti vā to tha icc etesu.

Ato, attha; etto, ettha.

Optionally, [there is] ‘a’ of the whole “eta”.
Optionally, when ‘to’ and ‘tha’ follow, the whole word “eta” becomes ‘a’.

  1. Ato = eta + to (“eta” is substituted by ‘a’ (§231)).
  2. Attha = eta + tha (“eta” is substituted by ‘a’ (§231); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).
  3. Etto = eta + to (“eta” is substituted by ‘e’ (§233); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).
  4. Ettha = eta + tha (“eta” is substituted by ‘e’ (§233); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).
232Kaccāyana Sutta. 267Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tre niccaṃ (462)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tre + niccaṃ = 2 words]

Sabbassa etasaddassa akāro hoti niccaṃ tra-paccaye pare.

Atra.

Always when ‘tra’ follows.
When the suffix ‘tra’ follows, the whole word “eta” always becomes ‘a’.

  1. Atra = eta + tra (“eta” is substituted by ‘a’ (§232)).
233Kaccāyana Sutta. 264Rūpasiddhi Sutta.E to-thesu ca57Etothesu vā (Sī).
[E + to-thesu + ca = 3 words]

Sabbassa etasaddassa ekāro hoti vā to tha icc etesu.

Etto, ato; ettha, attha.

And when ‘to’ and ‘tha’ follow, [there is] ‘e’.
Optionally, when ‘to’ and ‘tha’ follow, the whole word “eta” becomes ‘e’.

  1. Etto = eta + to (“eta” is substituted by ‘e’ (§233); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).
  2. Ettha = eta + tha (“eta” is substituted by ‘e’ (§233); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).
  3. Ato = eta + to (“eta” is substituted by ‘a’ (§231)).
  4. Attha = eta + tha (“eta” is substituted by ‘a’ (§231); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).

57Etothesu vā (Sī).
234Kaccāyana Sutta. 265Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Imass’ i thaṃ-dāni-ha-to-dhesu ca (463)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Imassa + i + thaṃ-dāni-ha-to-dhesu + ca = 4 words]

Imasaddassa sabbass’ eva ikāro hoti thaṃ dāni ha to dha icc etesu.

Itthaṃ, idāni, iha, ito, idha.58Ito paraṃ “cassaddaggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthan” ti pāṭo sīhaḷapotthake dissati. Padarūpasiddhiṭīkāyaṃ pana “caggahaṇaṃ sabbaggahaṇ’ ānukaḍḍhanatthan” ti vuttaṃ. (With respect to this, in the Sinhalese book the reading appears “the taking of the word ‘ca’ is for restricting”. But in the ṭīkā of the Padarūpasiddhi it is said “the taking of ‘ca’ is for the dragging of the taking of ‘sabba’”.)

And when ‘thaṃ’, ‘dāni’, ‘ha’, ‘to’ and ‘dha’ follow, [there is] ‘i’ of “ima”.
When ‘thaṃ’, ‘dāni’, ‘ha’, ‘to’ and ‘dha’ follow, the whole word “ima” becomes ‘i’.

  1. Itthaṃ = ima + thaṃ (“ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).
  2. Idāni = ima + dāni (“ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).
  3. Iha = ima + ha (“ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).
  4. Ito = ima + to (“ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).
  5. Idha = ima + dha (“ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).

58Ito paraṃ “cassaddaggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthan” ti pāṭo sīhaḷapotthake dissati. Padarūpasiddhiṭīkāyaṃ pana “caggahaṇaṃ sabbaggahaṇ’ ānukaḍḍhanatthan” ti vuttaṃ. (With respect to this, in the Sinhalese book the reading appears “the taking of the word ‘ca’ is for restricting”. But in the ṭīkā of the Padarūpasiddhi it is said “the taking of ‘ca’ is for the dragging of the taking of ‘sabba’”.)
235Kaccāyana Sutta. 281Rūpasiddhi Sutta.A dhunāmhi ca (464)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[A + dhunāmhi + ca = 3 words]

Imasaddassa sabbass’ eva akāro hoti dhunāmhi paccaye pare.

Adhunā.

Caggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ.

And when ‘dhunā’ follows, [there is] ‘a’.
When the suffix ‘dhunā’ follows, the whole word “ima” becomes ‘a’.

  1. Adhunā = ima + dhunā (“ima” is substituted by ‘a’ (§235)).

The taking of “ca” is for restricting [the scope of this sutta].

236Kaccāyana Sutta. 280Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Eta rahimhi (465)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Eta + rahimhi = 2 words]

Sabbass’ eva imasaddassa etādeso hoti rahimhi paccaye pare.

Etarahi.

When ‘rahi’ follows, [there is] “eta”.
When the suffix ‘rahi’ follows, the whole word “ima” is substituted by “eta”.

  1. Etarahi = ima + rahi (“ima” is substituted by “eta” (§236)).
237Kaccāyana Sutta. 176Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Itthiyam ato āpaccayo (466)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Itthiyaṃ + ato + āpaccayo = 3 words]

Itthiyaṃ vattamānāya akārato āpaccayo hoti.

Sabbā, yā, sā, kā, katarā.

In the feminine, after ‘a’, [there is] the suffix ‘ā’.
In the feminine, after the letter ‘a’, there is the suffix ‘ā’.

  1. Sabbā = sabba + si (‘ā’ is inserted after “sabba” (§237); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Yā = ya + si (‘ā’ is inserted after “ya” (§237); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Sā = ta + si (‘t’ of “ta” becomes ‘s’ (§174); ‘ā’ is inserted after “sa” (§237); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Kā = ka + si (‘ā’ is inserted after “ka” (§237); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Katarā = katara + si (‘ā’ is inserted after “katara” (§237); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
238Kaccāyana Sutta. 187Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Nadādito vā ī (467)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Nada-ādito + vā + ī = 3 words]

Nadādito vā anadādito vā itthiyaṃ vattamānāya ī-paccayo hoti.

Nadī, mahī, kumārī, taruṇī, sakhī, itthī.59Ito paraṃ “hatthī” ti udāharaṇaṃ katthaci dissati, taṃ na yuttaṃ itthiyaṃ “hatthinī” ti padass’ eva diṭṭhattā. (With respect to this, in some places the example “hatthī” appears; it is not appropriate, because in the feminine only the word “hatthinī” is found.)

Optionally, after “nada”, etc., [there is] ‘ī’.
Optionally, in the feminine, after “nada”, etc., and after the words which are not “nadādi”,60“Nadādi” are the words ending in ‘a’, like “nada”; “anadādi” are the words ending in ‘u’ and ‘o’ which do not belong to “nadādi”. there is the suffix ‘ī’.

  1. Nadī = nada + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “nada” (§238); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Mahī = maha + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “maha” (§238); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Kumārī = kumāra + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “kumāra” (§238); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Taruṇī = taruṇa + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “taruṇa” (§238); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Sakhī = sakha + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “sakha” (§238); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Itthī = itthi + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “itthi” (§238); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘i’ is elided (§83)).

59Ito paraṃ “hatthī” ti udāharaṇaṃ katthaci dissati, taṃ na yuttaṃ itthiyaṃ “hatthinī” ti padass’ eva diṭṭhattā. (With respect to this, in some places the example “hatthī” appears; it is not appropriate, because in the feminine only the word “hatthinī” is found.)
60“Nadādi” are the words ending in ‘a’, like “nada”; “anadādi” are the words ending in ‘u’ and ‘o’ which do not belong to “nadādi”.
239Kaccāyana Sutta. 190Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ṇava-ṇika-ṇeyya-ṇa-ntūhi (468)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ṇava-ṇika-ṇeyya-ṇa-ntūhi = 1 word]

Ṇava ṇika ṇeyya ṇa ntu icc etehi61Ṇavaṇikaṇeyyaṇantupaccayantehi (Rū). itthiyaṃ vattamānehi ī-paccayo hoti.

Māṇavī, paṇḍavī, nāvikī, venateyyī, kunteyyī, gotamī, guṇavatī, sāmāvatī.

After ‘ṇava’, ‘ṇika’, ‘ṇeyya’, ‘ṇa’ and ‘ntu’.
In the feminine, after [the words ending in] ‘ṇava’, ‘ṇika’, ‘ṇeyya’, ‘ṇa’ and ‘ntu’, there is the suffix ‘ī’.

  1. Māṇavī = māṇava + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “māṇava” (§239); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Paṇḍavī = paṇḍava + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “paṇḍava” (§239); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  3. Nāvikī = nāvika + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “nāvika” (§239); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Venateyyī = venateyya + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “venateyya” (§239); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  5. Kunteyyī = kunteyya + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “kunteyya” (§239); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Gotamī = gotama + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “gotama” (§239); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  7. Guṇavatī = guṇavantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “guṇavantu” (§239); ‘ntu’ is substituted by ‘ta’ (§241); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  8. Sāmāvatī = sāmāvantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “sāmāvantu” (§239); ‘ntu’ is substituted by ‘ta’ (§241); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).

61Ṇavaṇikaṇeyyaṇantupaccayantehi (Rū).
240Kaccāyana Sutta. 193Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Pati-bhikkhu-rāj’-īkārantehi inī (469-70)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Pati-bhikkhu-rāja-īkārantehi + inī = 2 words]

Pati-bhikkhu-rāj’-īkārantehi itthiyaṃ vattamānehi inī-paccayo hoti.

Gahapatānī, bhikkhunī, rājinī, hatthinī, daṇḍinī, medhāvinī, tapassinī.

After “pati”, “bhikkhu”, “rāja” and [the words] ending in the letter ‘ī’, [there is] ‘inī’.
In the feminine, after “pati”, “bhikkhu”, “rāja” and [the words] ending in the letter ‘ī’, there is the suffix ‘inī’.

  1. Gahapatānī = gahapati + si (‘inī’ is inserted after “gahapati” (§240); ‘i’ of “pati” is substituted by ‘a’ (§91); ‘i’ of ‘inī’ is elided (§13); ‘a’ is lengthened (§16); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  2. Bhikkhunī = bhikkhu + si (‘inī’ is inserted after “bhikkhu” (§240); ‘i’ of ‘inī’ is elided (§13); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  3. Rājinī = rāja + si (‘inī’ is inserted after “rāja” (§240); ‘a’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  4. Hatthinī = hatthī + si (‘inī’ is inserted after “hatthī” (§240); ‘ī’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  5. Daṇḍinī = daṇḍī + si (‘inī’ is inserted after “daṇḍī” (§240); ‘ī’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  6. Medhāvinī = medhāvī + si (‘inī’ is inserted after “medhāvī” (§240); ‘ī’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  7. Tapassinī = tapassī + si (‘inī’ is inserted after “tapassī” (§240); ‘ī’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
241Kaccāyana Sutta. 191Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ntussa tam īkāre
[Ntussa + taṃ + īkāre = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva ntupaccayassa takāro62To ādeso (K). hoti vā īkāre pare.

Guṇavatī, guṇavantī; kulavatī, kulavantī; satimatī, satimantī; mahatī, mahantī; gottamatī, gottamantī.

Optionally, when ‘ī’ follows, [there is] ‘ta’ of ‘ntu’.
Optionally, when the letter ‘ī’ follows, the whole suffix ‘ntu’ becomes ‘ta’.

  1. Guṇavatī = guṇavantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “guṇavantu” (§239); ‘ntu’ is substituted by ‘ta’ (§241); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  2. Guṇavantī = guṇavantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “guṇavantu” (§239); ‘u’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  3. Kulavatī = kulavantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “kulavantu” (§239); ‘ntu’ is substituted by ‘ta’ (§241); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  4. Kulavantī = kulavantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “kulavantu” (§239); ‘u’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  5. Satimatī = satimantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “satimantu” (§239); ‘ntu’ is substituted by ‘ta’ (§241); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  6. Satimantī = satimantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “satimantu” (§239); ‘u’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  7. Mahatī = mahantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “mahantu” (§239); ‘ntu’ is substituted by ‘ta’ (§241); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  8. Mahantī = mahantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “mahantu” (§239); ‘u’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  9. Gottamatī = gottamantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “gottamantu” (§239); ‘ntu’ is substituted by ‘ta’ (§241); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  10. Gottamantī = gottamantu + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “gottamantu” (§239); ‘u’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).

62To ādeso (K).
242Kaccāyana Sutta. 192Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Bhavato bhoto
[Bhavato + bhoto = 2 words]

Sabbass’ eva bhavantasaddassa bhotādeso hoti īkāre itthigate63Itthiyaṃ kate (Sī). pare.

Bhoti ayye (Vin. ii, 280)Vinaya-piṭaka · vol. ii, p. 280, bhoti kaññe, bhoti Kharādiye (Khu. v, 4)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. v, p. 4.

“Bhota” of “bhavanta”.
In the feminine, when ‘ī’ follows, the whole word “bhavanta” is substituted by “bhota”.

  1. Bhoti ayye (O lady!), bhoti kaññe (O girl!), bhoti Kharādiye (O Kharādiyā!):
    • Bhoti = bhavanta + si (‘ī’ is inserted after “bhavanta” (§239); “bhavanta” is substituted by “bhota” (§242); ‘si’ is elided (§220); ‘a’ is elided (§83); ‘ī’ is shortened (§245)).

63Itthiyaṃ kate (Sī).
243Kaccāyana Sutta. 110Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Bho ge tu (473-84)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Bho + ge + tu = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva bhavantasaddassa bho-ādeso hoti ge pare.

Bho purisa, bho aggi, bho rāja, bho sattha, bho daṇḍi, bho sayambhu.

Ge ti kimatthaṃ? Bhavatā, bhavaṃ.64Bhavato (Sī).

Tuggahaṇena aññasmim pi vacane sabbassa bhavantasaddassa bhonta bhante bhonto bhadde bhotā bhoto icc ete ādesā honti. Bhonta, bhante, bhonto, bhadde, bhotā, bhoto.

When ‘ga’ follows, [there is] “bho”.
When ‘ga’ follows, the whole word “bhavanta” is substituted by “bho”.

  1. Bho purisa, bho aggi, bho rāja, bho sattha, bho daṇḍi, bho sayambhu:
    • Bho = bhavanta + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); “bhavanta” is substituted by “bho” (§243); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).

What is the purpose of saying “when ‘ga’ follows”? [This sutta does not apply when ‘ga’ does not follow, such as in:] bhavatā, bhavaṃ.

By taking “tu”, also when other inflections follow, the whole word “bhavanta” is substituted by “bhonta”, “bhante”, “bhonto”, “bhadde”, “bhotā” and “bhoto”. Bhonta, bhante, bhonto, bhadde, bhotā, bhoto.


64Bhavato (Sī).
244Kaccāyana Sutta. 72Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Akāra-pitādyantānam ā (475)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Akāra-pitu-ādi-antānaṃ + ā = 2 words]

Akāro ca pitādīnam anto ca āttam āpajjate ge pare.

Bho purisā, bho rājā, bho pitā, bho mātā, bho satthā.

‘Ā’ of the letter ‘a’ and of the end of “pitu”, etc.
When ‘ga’ follows, the letter ‘a’ and the end [vowel] of “pitu”, etc., become ‘ā’.

  1. Purisā = purisa + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  2. Rājā = rāja + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  3. Pitā = pitu + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  4. Mātā = mātu + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘u’ of “mātu” becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  5. Satthā = satthu + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
245Kaccāyana Sutta. 152Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Jha-la-pā rassaṃ (477)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Jha-la-pā + rassaṃ = 2 words]

Jha la pa icc ete rassam āpajjante ge pare.

Bho daṇḍi, bho sayambhu, bhoti itthi, bhoti vadhu.

‘Jha’, ‘la’ and ‘pa’ [become] short.
When ‘ga’ follows, ‘jha’, ‘la’ and ‘pa’ are shortened.

  1. Daṇḍi = daṇḍī + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ī’ is named ‘jha’ (§58); ‘ī’ is shortened (§245); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  2. Sayambhu = sayambhū + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ū’ is named ‘la’ (§58); ‘ū’ is shortened (§245); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  3. Itthi = itthī + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ī’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘ī’ is shortened (§245); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  4. Vadhu = vadhū + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘ū’ is named ‘pa’ (§59); ‘ū’ is shortened (§245); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
246Kaccāyana Sutta. 73Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Ākāro vā (476, 478-9)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Ākāro + vā = 2 words]

Ākāro rassam āpajjate vā ge pare.

Bho rāja, bho rājā; bho atta, bho attā; bho sakha, bho sakhā; bho sattha, bho satthā.

Optionally, the letter ‘ā’.
Optionally, when ‘ga’ follows, ‘ā’ is shortened.

  1. Rāja = rāja + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘ā’ is shortened (§246); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  2. Rājā = rāja + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  3. Atta = atta + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘ā’ is shortened (§246); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  4. Attā = atta + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  5. Sakha = sakha + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘ā’ is shortened (§246); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  6. Sakhā = sakha + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  7. Sattha = satthu + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘ā’ is shortened (§246); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
  8. Satthā = satthu + si (‘si’ is named ‘ga’ (§57); ‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘ā’ (§244); ‘si’ is elided (§220)).
Iti nāma-kappe catuttho kaṇḍo
Thus ends the fourth section of the noun chapter
Pañcama-Kaṇḍa· Fifth section
247Kaccāyana Sutta. 261Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tvādayo vibhattisaññāyo (492)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[To-ādayo + vibhattisaññāyo = 2 words]

To ādi yesaṃ paccayānaṃ, te honti tvādayo. Te paccayā tvādayo vibhattisaññā ’va daṭṭhabbā.

Sabbato, yato, tato, kuto, ato, ito, sabbadā, yadā, tadā, kadā, idha, idāni.

Those beginning with ‘to’ are named “inflections”.
The suffixes beginning with ‘to’ are [called] ‘tvādi’. These suffixes ‘tvādi’ are to be regarded as “inflections”.

  1. Sabbato = sabba + to.
  2. Yato = ya + to.
  3. Tato = ta + to.
  4. Kuto = kiṃ + to (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (§230)).
  5. Ato = eta + to (“eta” is substituted by ‘a’ (§231)).
  6. Ito = ima + to (“ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).
  7. Sabbadā = sabba + dā.
  8. Yadā = ya + dā.
  9. Tadā = ta + dā.
  10. Kadā = kiṃ + dā (“kiṃ” is substituted by “ka” (“ca” of §227)).
  11. Idha = ima + dha (“ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).
  12. Idāni = ima + dāni (“ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).65Note: According to this sutta, these suffixes are to be regarded as inflections.

65Note: According to this sutta, these suffixes are to be regarded as inflections.
248Kaccāyana Sutta. 260Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Kvaci to pañcamyatthe (493)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Kvaci + to + pañcamī-atthe = 3 words]

Kvaci topaccayo hoti pañcamyatthe.

Sabbato, yato, tato, kuto, ato, ito.

Kvacī ti kimatthaṃ? Sabbasmā, imasmā.

Sometimes, [there is] ‘to’ in the meaning of the fifth.
Sometimes, in the meaning of the fifth [inflection], there is the suffix ‘to’.

  1. Sabbato = sabba + to (‘to’ is used in the meaning of the fifth inflection (§248)).
  2. Yato = ya + to (‘to’ is used in the meaning of the fifth inflection (§248)).
  3. Tato = ta + to (‘to’ is used in the meaning of the fifth inflection (§248)).
  4. Kuto = kiṃ + to (‘to’ is used in the meaning of the fifth inflection (§248); “kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (§230)).
  5. Ato = eta + to (‘to’ is used in the meaning of the fifth inflection (§248); “eta” is substituted by ‘a’ (§231)).
  6. Ito = ima + to (‘to’ is used in the meaning of the fifth inflection (§248); “ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).

What is the purpose of saying “sometimes”? [To allow exceptions to this sutta, such as in:] sabbasmā, imasmā.

249Kaccāyana Sutta. 266Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tra-tha sattamiyā sabbanāmehi (494)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tra-tha + sattamiyā + sabbanāmehi = 3 words]

Tra tha icc ete paccayā honti sattamyatthe sabbanāmehi.

Sabbatra, sabbattha; yatra, yattha; tatra, tattha.

After the pronouns, in the seventh, [there are] ‘tra’ and ‘tha’.
After the pronouns, in the meaning of the seventh [inflection], there are the suffixes ‘tra’ and ‘tha’.

  1. Sabbatra = sabba + tra (‘tra’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§249)).
  2. Sabbattha = sabba + tha (‘tha’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§249); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).
  3. Yatra = ya + tra (‘tra’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§249)).
  4. Yattha = ya + tha (‘tha’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§249); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).
  5. Tatra = ta + tra (‘tra’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§249)).
  6. Tattha = ta + tha (‘tha’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§249); ‘t’ is doubled (§28)).
250Kaccāyana Sutta. 268Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbato dhi (502)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbato + dhi = 2 words]

Sabba icc etasmā dhi-paccayo hoti kvaci sattamyatthe.

Sabbadhi, sabbasmiṃ.

After “sabba”, [there is] ‘dhi’.
Sometimes, in the meaning of the seventh [inflection], after “sabba” there is the suffix ‘dhi’.

  1. Sabbadhi = sabba + dhi (‘dhi’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§250)).
  2. Sabbasmiṃ = sabba + smiṃ (form with the regular inflection, allowed by “sometimes”).
251Kaccāyana Sutta. 269Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Kiṃsmā vo (499)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Kiṃsmā + vo = 2 words]

Kim icc etasmā va-paccayo hoti sattamyatthe.

Kva gato ’si tvaṃ devānaṃ piyatissa.

After “kiṃ” [there is] ‘va’.
In the meaning of the seventh [inflection], after “kiṃ” there is the suffix ‘va’.

  1. Kva gato ’si tvaṃ Devānaṃ Piyatissa (where have you gone, Devānaṃ Piyatissa?):
    • Kva = kiṃ + va (‘va’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§251); “kiṃ” is substituted by “ka” (§227); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
252Kaccāyana Sutta. 271Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Hiṃ-haṃ-hiñcanaṃ (500)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Hiṃ-haṃ-hiñcanaṃ = 1 word]

Kim icc etasmā hiṃ haṃ hiñcanaṃ icc ete paccayā honti sattamyatthe.

Kuhiṃ, kuhaṃ, kuhiñcanaṃ.

‘Hiṃ’, ‘haṃ’ and ‘hiñcanaṃ’.
In the meaning of the seventh [inflection], after “kiṃ” there are the suffixes ‘hiṃ’, ‘haṃ’ and ‘hiñcanaṃ’.

  1. Kuhiṃ = kiṃ + hiṃ (‘hiṃ’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§252); “kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (§228)).
  2. Kuhaṃ = kiṃ + haṃ (‘haṃ’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§252); “kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (§228)).
  3. Kuhiñcanaṃ = kiṃ + hiñcanaṃ (‘hiñcanaṃ’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§252); “kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (“ca” of §228)).
253Kaccāyana Sutta. 273Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tamhā ca (501)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tamhā + ca = 2 words]

Tamhā ca hiṃ haṃ icc ete paccayā honti sattamyatthe.

Tahiṃ, tahaṃ.

Caggahaṇaṃ hiñcanaggahaṇa-nivattanatthaṃ.

And after “ta”.
In the meaning of the seventh [inflection], after “ta” there are the suffixes ‘hiṃ’ and ‘haṃ’.

  1. Tahiṃ = ta + hiṃ (‘hiṃ’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§253)).
  2. Tahaṃ = ta + haṃ (‘haṃ’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§253)).

The taking of “ca” is for excluding the taking of ‘hiñcanaṃ’.

254Kaccāyana Sutta. 274Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Imasmā ha-dhā ca (503)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Imasmā + ha-dhā + ca = 3 words]

Imasmā ha dha icc ete paccayā honti sattamyatthe.

Iha, idha.

Caggahaṇam avadhāraṇatthaṃ.

And after “ima” [there are] ‘ha’ and ‘dha’.
In the meaning of the seventh [inflection], after “ima” there are the suffixes ‘ha’ and ‘dha’.

  1. Iha = ima + ha (‘ha’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§254); “ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).
  2. Idha = ima + dha (‘dha’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§254); “ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).

The taking of “ca” is for restricting [the scope of this sutta with respect to words other than “ima”].

255Kaccāyana Sutta. 275Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yato hiṃ (504)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yato + hiṃ = 2 words]

Tasmā yato hiṃ-paccayo hoti sattamyatthe.

Yahiṃ.

After “ya” [there is] ‘hiṃ’.
In the meaning of the seventh [inflection], after “ya” there is the suffix ‘hiṃ’.

  1. Yahiṃ = ya + hiṃ (‘hiṃ’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection (§255)).
256Kaccāyana Sutta. 0Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Kāle
[Kāle = 1 word]

“Kāle” icc etaṃ adhikāratthaṃ veditabbaṃ.

In time.
It should be understood that “kāle” has the value of a governing aphorism.66This adhikāra sutta has influence from §257 · Kiṃ-sabb’-aññ’-eka-ya-kuhi dā-dācanaṃ — After “kiṃ”, “sabba”, “añña”, “eka”, “ya” and “ku”, [there are] ‘dā’ and ‘dācanaṃ’.">§257 to §259 · Imasmā rahi-dhunā-dāni ca — And after “ima” [there are] ‘rahi’, ‘dhunā’ and ‘dāni’.">§259.

66This adhikāra sutta has influence from §257 to §259.
257Kaccāyana Sutta. 276Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Kiṃ-sabb’-aññ’-eka-ya-kuhi dā-dācanaṃ (505)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Kiṃ-sabba-añña-eka-ya-kuhi + dā-dācanaṃ = 2 words]

Kiṃ sabba añña eka ya ku icc etehi dā dācanaṃ icc ete paccayā honti kāle sattamyatthe.

Kadā, sabbadā, aññadā, ekadā, yadā, kudācanaṃ.

After “kiṃ”, “sabba”, “añña”, “eka”, “ya” and “ku”, [there are] ‘dā’ and ‘dācanaṃ’.
In the meaning of the seventh [inflection], in time, after “kiṃ”, “sabba”, “añña”, “eka”, “ya” and “ku” there are the suffixes ‘dā’ and ‘dācanaṃ’.

  1. Kadā = kiṃ + dā (‘dā’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§257); “kiṃ” is substituted by “ka” (§227)).
  2. Sabbadā = sabba + dā (‘dā’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§257)).
  3. Aññadā = añña + dā (‘dā’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§257)).
  4. Ekadā = eka + dā (‘dā’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§257)).
  5. Yadā = ya + dā (‘dā’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§257)).
  6. Kudācanaṃ = kiṃ + dācanaṃ (‘dācanaṃ’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§257); “kiṃ” is substituted by “ku” (“ca” of §228)).
258Kaccāyana Sutta. 278Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Tamhā dāni ca (506)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Tamhā + dāni + ca = 3 words]

Ta icc etasmā dāni dā icc ete paccayā honti kāle sattamyatthe.

Tadāni, tadā. Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And after “ta” [there is] ‘dāni’.
In the meaning of the seventh [inflection], in time, after “ta” there are the suffixes ‘dāni’ and ‘dā’.

  1. Tadāni = ta + dāni (‘dāni’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§258)).
  2. Tadā = ta + dā (‘dā’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (“ca” of §258)).

The taking of “ca” is for the dragging of ‘dā’.

259Kaccāyana Sutta. 279Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Imasmā rahi-dhunā-dāni ca (507)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Imasmā + rahi-dhunā-dāni + ca = 3 words]

Imasmā rahi dhunā dāni icc ete paccayā honti kāle sattamyatthe.

Etarahi, adhunā, idāni.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And after “ima” [there are] ‘rahi’, ‘dhunā’ and ‘dāni’.
In the meaning of the seventh [inflection], in time, after “ima” there are the suffixes ‘rahi’, ‘dhunā’ and ‘dāni’.

  1. Etarahi = ima + rahi (‘rahi’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§259); “ima” is substituted by “eta” (§236)).
  2. Adhunā = ima + dhunā (‘dhunā’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§259); “ima” is substituted by ‘a’ (§235)).
  3. Idāni = ima + dāni (‘dāni’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§259); “ima” is substituted by ‘i’ (§234)).

The taking of “ca” is for the dragging of ‘dāni’.

260Kaccāyana Sutta. 277Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Sabbassa so dāmhi vā (508)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Sabbassa + so + dāmhi + vā = 4 words]

Sabba icc etassa sakārādeso hoti vā dāmhi paccaye pare.

Sadā, sabbadā.

Optionally, when ‘dā’ follows, [there is] ‘sa’ of “sabba”.
Optionally, when the suffix ‘dā’ follows, “sabba” is substituted by ‘sa’.

  1. Sadā = sabba + dā (‘dā’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§257); “sabba” is substituted by ‘sa’ (§260)).
  2. Sabbadā = sabba + dā (‘dā’ is used in the meaning of the seventh inflection to indicate time (§257)).
261Kaccāyana Sutta. 369Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Avaṇṇo ye lopañ ca (509)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Avaṇṇo + ye + lopaṃ + ca = 4 words]

Avaṇṇo ye paccaye pare lopam āpajjate.

Bāhussaccaṃ (Khu. i, 4)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 4; paṇḍiccaṃ (Abhi. iii, 128)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 128; vepullaṃ (Abhi. iii, 128)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 128; kāruññaṃ; kosallaṃ (Abhi. iii, 128)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 128; sāmaññaṃ (Khu. vi, 177)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 177; sohajjaṃ.

And when ‘ya’ follows, ‘a’ and ‘ā’ are elided.
When the suffix ‘ya’ follows, the letters ‘a’ and ‘ā’ are elided.67Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffix ‘ṇya’. See §269 · Yavataṃ ta-la-ṇa-dakārānaṃ byañjanāni ca-la-ña-ja-kārattaṃ — The consonants ‘t’, ‘l’, ‘ṇ’ and ‘d’ which have ‘y’ [become] the letters ‘c’, ‘l’, ‘ñ’ and ‘j’.">§269.

67Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffix ‘ṇya’. See §269.
262Kaccāyana Sutta. 391Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Vuḍḍhassa jo iy’-iṭṭhesu (513)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Vuḍḍhassa + jo + iya-iṭṭhesu = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva vuḍḍhasaddassa jo-ādeso hoti iya iṭṭha icc etesu paccayesu.

Jeyyo, jeṭṭho (D. ii, 13)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 13.

When ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’ follow, [there is] ‘jo’ of “vuḍḍha”.
When the suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’ follow, the whole word “vuḍḍha” is substituted by “jo”.68Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.

68Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.
263Kaccāyana Sutta. 392Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Pasatthassa so ca (512)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Pasatthassa + so + ca = 3 words]

Sabbass’ eva pasatthasaddassa so-ādeso hoti, jādeso ca iya iṭṭha icc etesu paccayesu.

Seyyo (A. i, 130)Aṅguttara-nikāya · vol. i, p. 130, seṭṭho (D. ii, 13)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 13, jeyyo, jeṭṭho (D. ii, 13)Dīgha-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 13.

And [there is] ‘sa’ of “pasattha”.
When the suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’ follow, the whole word “pasattha” is substituted by “sa”, and [there is] also the substitution “ja”.69Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.

69Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.
264Kaccāyana Sutta. 393Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Antikassa nedo (514)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Antikassa + nedo = 2 words]

Sabbassa antikasaddassa nedādeso hoti iya iṭṭha icc etesu paccayesu.

Nediyo, nediṭṭho.

“Neda” of “antika”.
When the suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’ follow, the whole word “antika” is substituted by “neda”.70Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.

70Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.
265Kaccāyana Sutta. 394Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Bāḷhassa sādho (515)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Bāḷhassa + sādho = 2 words]

Sabbassa bāḷhasaddassa sādhādeso hoti iya iṭṭha icc etesu paccayesu.

Sādhiyo, sādhiṭṭho.

“Sādha” of “bāḷha”.
When the suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’ follow, the whole word “bāḷha” is substituted by “sādha”.71Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.

71Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.
266Kaccāyana Sutta. 395Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Appassa kaṇ (516)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Appassa + kaṇ = 2 words]

Sabbassa appasaddassa kaṇādeso hoti iya iṭṭha icc etesu paccayesu.

Kaṇiyo, kaṇiṭṭho.

“Kaṇ” of “appa”.
When the suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’ follow, the whole word “appa” is substituted by “kaṇ”.72Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.

72Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.
267Kaccāyana Sutta. 396Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yuvānañ ca (517)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yuvānaṃ + ca = 2 words]

Sabbassa yuvasaddassa kaṇādeso hoti iya iṭṭha icc etesu paccayesu.

Kaniyo, kaniṭṭho.

Caggahaṇam anukaḍḍhanatthaṃ.

And of “yuva”.
When the suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’ follow, the whole word “yuva” is substituted by “kaṇ”.73Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.
The taking of “ca” is for the dragging of the word “kaṇ”.

73Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.
268Kaccāyana Sutta. 397Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Vantu-mantu-vīnañ ca lopo (518)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Vantu-mantu-vīnaṃ + ca + lopo = 3 words]

Vantu mantu vī icc etesaṃ paccayānaṃ lopo hoti iya iṭṭha icc etesu paccayesu.

Guṇiyo, guṇiṭṭho, satiyo, satiṭṭho, medhiyo, medhiṭṭho.

And there is elision of “vantu”, “mantu” and “vī”.
When the suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’ follow, the suffixes “vantu”, “mantu” and “vī” are elided.

  1. Guṇiyo = guṇavantu + iya + si (“vantu” is elided (§268); ‘a’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104)).
  2. Guṇiṭṭho = guṇavantu + iṭṭha + si (“vantu” is elided (§268); ‘a’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104)).
  3. Satiyo = satimantu + iya + si (“mantu” is elided (§268); ‘i’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104)).
  4. Satiṭṭho = satimantu + iṭṭha + si (“mantu” is elided (§268); ‘i’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104)).
  5. Medhiyo = medhāvī + iya + si (“vī” is elided (§268); ‘ā’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104)).
  6. Medhiṭṭho = medhāvī + iṭṭha + si (“vī” is elided (§268); ‘ā’ is elided (§83); ‘si’ is substituted by ‘o’ (§104)).74Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.

74Note: The examples here are of the taddhita suffixes ‘iya’ and ‘iṭṭha’.
269Kaccāyana Sutta. 41Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Yavataṃ ta-la-ṇa-dakārānaṃ byañjanāni ca-la-ña-ja-kārattaṃ (104, 106, 119, 121-5)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Yavataṃ + ta-la-ṇa-da-kārānaṃ + byañjanāni + ca-la-ña-ja-kārattaṃ = 4 words]

Yakāravantānaṃ ta-la-ṇa-dakārānaṃ byañjanāni ca-la-ña-ja-kārattam āpajjante yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.

Bāhussaccaṃ; paṇḍiccaṃ (Abhi. iii, 128)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 128; vepullaṃ (Abhi. iii, 128)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 128; kāruññaṃ (Khu. vi, 177)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. vi, p. 177; kosallaṃ (Abhi. iii, 128)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 128; nepuññaṃ (Abhi. iii, 128)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 128; sāmaññaṃ (S. iii, 20)Saṃyutta-nikāya · vol. iii, p. 20; sohajjaṃ.

Yavatam ti kimatthaṃ? Tiṇadalaṃ.

Ta-la-ṇa-da-kārānam iti kimatthaṃ? Ālasyaṃ (Abhi. iii, 364)Abhidhamma-piṭaka · vol. iii, p. 364; ārogyaṃ (Khu. i, 395)Khuddaka-nikāya · vol. i, p. 395.

Byañjanāni iti kimatthaṃ? Maccunā.

Kāraggahaṇaṃ kimatthaṃ? Yakārassa makārādesañāpanatthaṃ. Opammaṃ (M. ii, 42)Majjhima-nikāya · vol. ii, p. 42.

The consonants ‘t’, ‘l’, ‘ṇ’ and ‘d’ which have ‘y’ [become] the letters ‘c’, ‘l’, ‘ñ’ and ‘j’.
The consonants ‘t’, ‘l’, ‘ṇ’ and ‘d’ which have the letter ‘y’ become respectively the letters ‘c’, ‘l’, ‘ñ’ and ‘j’.

  1. Bāhussaccaṃ = bahussuta + ṇya (‘ṇ’ is elided (§396); ‘a’ becomes ‘ā’ (§400); the last ‘a’ is elided (§261); ‘t’ together with ‘y’ becomes ‘c’ (§269); ‘c’ is doubled (§28); ‘u’ becomes ‘a’ (§404)).

What is the purpose of saying “which have ‘ya’”? [This sutta does not apply when there is no ‘ya’, such as in:] Tiṇadalaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “the letters ‘t’, ‘l’, ‘ṇ’ and ‘d’”? [This sutta does not apply when there are none of these letters, such as in:] Ālasyaṃ, ārogyaṃ.

What is the purpose of saying “consonants”?75There are two explanations here, one by the Nyāsa and the other by the Rūpasiddhi. The Nyāsa says that after “musa pāṇacāge” there is the suffix ‘tyu’. By §638 the end of the root, ‘sa’, and ‘u’ of ‘mu’ are elided. [This sutta does not apply when there are no consonants, such as in:] Maccunā.

What is the purpose of taking ‘kāra’? To make known the substitution of the letter ‘ya’ by the letter ‘ma’, such as in: Opammaṃ.76Translator's note (Ven. A. Thitzana): These forms are abstract nouns formed with the taddhita suffix ṇya, “the state of being X”, and their full derivation is shared between this chapter and the taddhita one. Take paṇḍiccaṃ as a model. (1) ṇya is added to the base (Thitzana's sutta 360): paṇḍita + ṇya. (2) ‘ṇ’ of the suffix is elided (his sutta 396): paṇḍita + ya. (3) The end vowel of the base is elided before ‘ya’ (§261 · Avaṇṇo ye lopañ ca — And when ‘ya’ follows, ‘a’ and ‘ā’ are elided.">§261): paṇḍit + ya. (4) The consonant, together with ‘y’, becomes the corresponding one according to this sutta —‘t’ into ‘c’, ‘l’ into ‘l’, ‘ṇ’ into ‘ñ’, ‘d’ into ‘j’—: paṇḍic°. (5) The resulting consonant is doubled (§28 · Para dvebhāvo ṭhāne (1-Sandhi-Kappa)">§28): paṇḍicca. (6) The vowel of the base receives vuddhi (his sutta 400): ‘u’ becomes ‘o’ in kosallaṃ and sohajjaṃ; ‘i’ becomes ‘e’ in vepullaṃ and nepuññaṃ; ‘a’ is lengthened in kāruññaṃ and sāmaññaṃ (in bāhussaccaṃ, on the other hand, ‘u’ of “suta” becomes ‘a’; Nandisena cites §404 · Tesu vuddhi-lopāgama-vikāra-viparītādesā ca (5-Taddhita-Kappa)">§404). (7) Finally, being neuter, ‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§219 · Si ’ṃ — ‘Si’ [becomes] ‘aṃ’.">§219) and the end ‘a’ is elided (§83 · Saralopo ’mādesa-paccayādimhi saralope tu pakati — When ‘aṃ’, a substitution, a suffix, etc., follow, [there is] elision of the vowel; when there is elision of the vowel, [the remaining vowel remains] natural.">§83): paṇḍiccaṃ. The bases of the eight examples: bāhussuta → bāhussaccaṃ; paṇḍita → paṇḍiccaṃ; vipula → vepullaṃ; karuṇā → kāruññaṃ; kusala → kosallaṃ; nipuṇa → nepuññaṃ; samaṇa —or samāna— → sāmaññaṃ; suhada → sohajjaṃ. In opammaṃ (upamā + ṇya) ‘y’ is substituted by ‘m’, according to the fourth kimatthaṃ of this sutta, with ‘u’ become ‘o’.


75There are two explanations here, one by the Nyāsa and the other by the Rūpasiddhi. The Nyāsa says that after “musa pāṇacāge” there is the suffix ‘tyu’. By §638 the end of the root, ‘sa’, and ‘u’ of ‘mu’ are elided.
76Translator's note (Ven. A. Thitzana): These forms are abstract nouns formed with the taddhita suffix ṇya, “the state of being X”, and their full derivation is shared between this chapter and the taddhita one. Take paṇḍiccaṃ as a model. (1) ṇya is added to the base (Thitzana's sutta 360): paṇḍita + ṇya. (2) ‘ṇ’ of the suffix is elided (his sutta 396): paṇḍita + ya. (3) The end vowel of the base is elided before ‘ya’ (§261): paṇḍit + ya. (4) The consonant, together with ‘y’, becomes the corresponding one according to this sutta —‘t’ into ‘c’, ‘l’ into ‘l’, ‘ṇ’ into ‘ñ’, ‘d’ into ‘j’—: paṇḍic°. (5) The resulting consonant is doubled (§28): paṇḍicca. (6) The vowel of the base receives vuddhi (his sutta 400): ‘u’ becomes ‘o’ in kosallaṃ and sohajjaṃ; ‘i’ becomes ‘e’ in vepullaṃ and nepuññaṃ; ‘a’ is lengthened in kāruññaṃ and sāmaññaṃ (in bāhussaccaṃ, on the other hand, ‘u’ of “suta” becomes ‘a’; Nandisena cites §404). (7) Finally, being neuter, ‘si’ is substituted by ‘aṃ’ (§219) and the end ‘a’ is elided (§83): paṇḍiccaṃ. The bases of the eight examples: bāhussuta → bāhussaccaṃ; paṇḍita → paṇḍiccaṃ; vipula → vepullaṃ; karuṇā → kāruññaṃ; kusala → kosallaṃ; nipuṇa → nepuññaṃ; samaṇa —or samāna— → sāmaññaṃ; suhada → sohajjaṃ. In opammaṃ (upamā + ṇya) ‘y’ is substituted by ‘m’, according to the fourth kimatthaṃ of this sutta, with ‘u’ become ‘o’.
270Kaccāyana Sutta. 120Rūpasiddhi Sutta.Amha-tumha-ntu-rāja-brahm’-atta-sakha-satthu-pitādihi smā nā ’va (542)Saddanīti-Suttamālā Sutta
[Amha-tumha-ntu-rāja-brahma-atta-sakha-satthu-pitu-ādīhi + smā + nā + iva = 4 words]

Amha tumha ntu rāja brahma atta sakha satthu pitu icc evamādīhi smāvacanaṃ nā ’va daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Mayā, tayā, guṇavatā, raññā, brahmunā, attanā, sakhinā, satthārā, pitarā, mātarā, bhātarā, dhītarā, kattārā, vattārā.

Etehī ti kimatthaṃ? Purisā.

After “amha”, “tumha”, “ntu”, “rāja”, “brahma”, “atta”, “sakha”, “satthu”, “pitu”, etc., ‘smā’ is like ‘nā’.
After “amha”, “tumha”, “ntu”, “rāja”, “brahma”, “atta”, “sakha”, “satthu”, “pitu”, etc., the inflection ‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’.

  1. Mayā = amha + smā (‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’ (§270); “amha” together with the inflection is substituted by “mayā” (§145)).
  2. Tayā = tumha + smā (‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’ (§270); “tumha” together with the inflection is substituted by “tayā” (§145)).
  3. Guṇavatā = guṇavantu + smā (‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’ (§270); “ntu” together with the inflection is substituted by ‘tā’ (§127)).
  4. Raññā = rāja + smā (‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’ (§270); “rāja” together with the inflection is substituted by “raññā” (§137)).
  5. Brahmunā = brahma + smā (‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’ (§270); ‘a’ of “brahma” becomes ‘u’ (§198)).
  6. Attanā = atta + smā (‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’ (§270); see also §214).
  7. Sakhinā = sakha + smā (‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’ (§270); ‘a’ of “sakha” is substituted by ‘i’ (§194)).
  8. Satthārā = satthu + smā (‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’ (§270); ‘u’ of “satthu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  9. Pitarā = pitu + smā (‘smā’ is to be regarded as ‘nā’ (§270); ‘u’ of “pitu” becomes ‘āra’ (§200); ‘nā’ is substituted by ‘ā’ (§207); ‘ā’ of “āra” is shortened (§209); ‘a’ is elided (§83)).
  10. Mātarā, Bhātarā, Dhītarā: [like pitarā].
  11. Kattārā, Vattārā: [like satthārā].

What is the purpose of saying “after these”? [This sutta does not apply when they are not these, such as in:] Purisā.

Iti nāmakappe pañcamo kaṇḍo
Thus ends the fifth section of the noun chapter
Nāmakappo Niṭṭhito
End of the Noun Chapter